Cat. No. W421-E1-03
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series
CS1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Ethernet Units
Construction of Applications
OPERATION MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-ETN21 (100Base-TX)
Ethernet Units
Construction of Applications
Operation Manual
Revised November 2005
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Program-
ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
xxii
xxii
xxiv
xxiv
xxvi
SECTION 1
1-1 Ethernet Unit Communications Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Functions Listed by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Table of Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Common Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
SECTION 2
2-1 Mail Send Function Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Mail Send Function Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Mail Send Function Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Using the Mail Send Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 Mail Send Function Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6 I/O Memory Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 Attached File Transfer Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8 Mail Send Function Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9 Example Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
11
17
18
24
26
27
28
30
SECTION 3
3-1 Mail Receive Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Mail Receive Function Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Using the Mail Receive Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Remote Mail Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Mail Receive Function Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 I/O Memory Data Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Attached File Transfer Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Mail Receive Function Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Example Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
36
38
42
60
60
62
63
65
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
4-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 FTP Server Function Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Using the FTP Server Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 FTP Server Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Using FTP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Checking FTP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Using File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 FTP File Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 UNIX Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
69
70
72
73
79
80
85
86
SECTION 5
5-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
91
94
94
SECTION 6
6-1 Overview of Socket Communications from Ethernet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Socket Service Function Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Using Socket Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Socket Service Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Using Socket Services with CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Precautions in Using Socket Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
100
103
106
107
110
112
136
155
SECTION 7
7-1 Overview of FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 FINS Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 FINS/TCP Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
162
163
171
192
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A
B
C
D
E
Ethernet Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP Status Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
197
199
201
203
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this Manual:
This manual describes the operation of the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units (100Base-
TX) for constructing applications and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install or operate the Ethernet Unit. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the fol-
lowing section.
Precautions
Section 1 introduces the Ethernet Unit’s communications services, including information on functions
and protocols.
Section 2 describes how to use the Ethernet Unit’s Mail Send Function, including specifications, sta-
tus details, application examples, and troubleshooting information.
Section 3 describes how to use the Ethernet Unit’s Mail Receive Function, including specifications,
status details, I/O memory data formats, file transfer timing, application examples, and troubleshooting
information.
Section 4 describes the functions provided by the FTP server.
Section 5 provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function, including details on speci-
fications, required settings, operations from CX-Programmer, and troubleshooting.
Section 6 describes the functionality provided by the Ethernet Unit via the socket services.
Section 7 provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks
using FINS commands. The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications
in reference to Ethernet Units.
Appendices provide information on Ethernet network parameters, the buffer configuration, TCP status
transitions, ASCII characters, maintenance, and inspections.
The related Operation Manual Construction of Networks (W420) provides the following information.
Section
Contents
Section 1
Overview of Ethernet Unit features, specifications, and description of the Unit parts and system configura-
tion for constructing Networks.
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Information on Ethernet Unit’s installation and initial settings required for operation.
Information on setting communications using CX-Programmer.
Information on words allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area for Ethernet Units.
Information on how to manage and use IP addresses.
Information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS
commands.
Section 7
Section 8
Information on the FINS commands that can be sent to an Ethernet Unit and the responses that
are returned by the Ethernet Unit.
Information on troubleshooting.
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relevant Manuals
The following table lists CS- and CJ-series manuals that contain information relevant to Ethernet Units.
Manual
number
Model
Name
Contents
W420
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Units Oper- Provides information on operating and installing
ation Manual 100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including details on basic
Construction of Net- settings and FINS communications.
works
Refer to the Communications Commands Reference
Manual (W342) for details on FINS commands that can
be sent to CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units when
using the FINS communications service.
W421
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Units Oper- Provides information on constructing host applications for
ation Manual
Construction of
Applications
(this manual)
100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including functions for send-
ing/receiving mail, socket service, automatic clock adjust-
ment, FTP server functions, and FINS communications.
W343
W342
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN11
Ethernet Units Oper- Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base-5
ation Manual
and 10Base-T Ethernet Units.
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
CS1W-SCU21
Communications
Commands Refer-
ence Manual
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communi-
cations commands used when sending communications
commands to CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units.
CS1W-SCB21/41
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1W-SCU41
W339
W393
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Con- Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installa-
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
trollers Operation
Manual
tion, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CS-
series PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro-
gramming Manual (W394).
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installa-
trollers Operation
Manual
tion, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJ-
series PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro-
gramming Manual (W394).
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual
number
Model
Name
Contents
W394
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Describes programming, tasks, file memory, and other
trollers Program-
ming Manual
functions for the CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera-
tion Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-
series PLCs).
W340
W414
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions
trollers Instructions
Reference Manual
supported by CS-series and CJ-series PCs. Use together
with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-series
PLCs), and Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394).
WS02-CX-@@JV3
CX-Programmer
Ver.3.@ Operation
Manual
Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer,
a Windows-based programming device, and CX-Net, a
Windows-based network configuration tool.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera-
tion Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-
series PLCs), Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394) and the Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual (W340) to perform pro-
gramming.
W341
W336
CQM1H-PRO01
CQM1-PRO01
C200H-PRO27 +
CS1W-KS001
Programming Con-
soles Operation
Manual
Provides information on how to operate the Programming
Console.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera-
tion Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-
series PLCs), Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394) and the Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual (W340) to perform pro-
gramming.
CS1W-SCB21/41
CS1W-SCU21
CJ1W-SCU41
Serial Communica-
tions Boards and
Serial Communica-
tions Units Operation
Manual
Accessing the PLC connected to the CX-Programmer via
Ethernet or the host computer or other device connected
to the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
Describes the use of Serial Communications Units and
Boards, including details on hardware, software, and
standard system protocols.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per-
sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage Units in the CS/CJ Series
according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Product nameplate
CS1W-
UNIT
Unit version
Example for unit version 1.3
Lot No.
Lot No. 040401 0000 Ver.1.3
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the
Unit Manufacturing Information.
Note The unit versions of Pre-Ver.2.0 Units cannot be confirmed in Unit Manufac-
turing Information. The following dialog box is displayed.
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing informa-
tion - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
Unit version
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the Unit connected online.
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Unit Version Label
The following unit version label is provided with the Ethernet Unit.
This label can be attached to the front of the Ethernet Unit to differentiate
between Ethernet Units with different unit versions.
Unit Version Notation
In this manual, the unit version of a Ethernet Unit is given as shown in the fol-
lowing table.
Product nameplate
Notation used in this manual
Special remarks
Ver. 2.0 or later number Ethernet Unit Ver. 1.3 or later
shown to right of the lot
number
Information without reference to specific Unit
Versions applies to all versions of the Unit.
Blank to the right of lot
number
Pre-Ver. 1.3 Ethernet Units
Unit Versions and Lot Numbers
Type
Model
Date of manufacture
March 2003 or earlier
April 2004 or later
Unit Ver. 1.3
(Lot No.: 040401)
Ver. 4.0
Special I/O Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
WS02-CXPC1-JV@ Ver. 3.3 or earlier
No version code
Supported Software
CX-Programmer
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units (100Base-TX).
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Ethernet Units. You
must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate an Ethernet
Unit.
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi
xxvi
6-1
6-2
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Audience
1
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your
OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above-men-
tioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
3
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of
the output relays, or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is over-
loaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before changing or transferring to
another node the contents of a program, the PLC Setup, I/O tables, or I/O
memory. Changing or transferring any of these without confirming safety may
result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Environment Precautions
4
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the Ethernet Unit.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit and Slaves before
attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may
result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, Memory Packs, or
Master Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the Ethernet Unit or the system, or could damage the Ethernet Unit. Always
heed these precautions.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external cir-
cuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
xxiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
5
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures
• Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications
cable.
• Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high-ten-
sion lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra-
dius.
• Do not pull on the communications cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables.
• Always lay communications cable inside ducts.
• Use appropriate communications cables.
• Make sure that the terminal blocks, expansion cable connectors, and
other items with locking devices are locked in place.
• Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com-
pletely.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• After replacing Units, resume operation only after transferring to the new
CPU Unit and/or Special I/O Units the contents of the DM Area, HR Area,
programs, parameters, and other data required for resuming operation.
Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunc-
tion or damage.
xxv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conformance to EC Directives
6
• When transporting the Unit, use special packing boxes and protect it from
being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electromagnetic
Interference) Standards in the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) stan-
dards are as follows:
Ethernet Unit
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
EMS
EN61000-6-2
EMI
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m
regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
xxvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1
Introduction
1-1 Ethernet Unit Communications Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Functions Listed by Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Table of Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Common Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 POP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Unit Communications Services
Section 1-1
1-1 Ethernet Unit Communications Services
Service
Main functions
Counterpart device
Mail send function Through intranet or Used to e-mail specified I/O memory Computer
SECTION 2Mail
Send Function
internet
data or a file (up to 1 MB) from the
PLC to the computer automatically
when a preset condition is met.
(E-mail software)
Mail receive func-
tion
Used to perform operations in the PLC Computer
from the computer, such as reading or (E-mail software)
writing I/O memory data, backing up
SECTION 3
Receive Mail
Function
data, changing the operating mode, or
transferring files (up to 1 MB).
FTP server func-
tion
Through intranet or Used to transfer large files between
internet (See note.) the computer and PLC.
Computer
Socket service
function
Used to transfer data between gen-
eral-purpose applications and the
PLC.
Computer
SECTION 6
Socket Services
(General applica-
tions that do not use
FINS communica-
tions)
Automatic clock
adjust function
Through intranet
Used to automatically adjust the PLC's SNTP Server
internal clock.
SECTION 5
Automatic Clock
Adjustment
Function
FINS communica- Through intranet or Used to access the PLC from a com- Computer
tions
internet (See note.) puter (FINS application) or send mes- (User-created FINS Using FINS
sage communications from one PLC
to another.
communications
application)
Communica-
tions to Create
Host Applica-
tions
Note The PLC can be accessed with
FINS message communications
even from a DHCP client com-
puter or computer with an
unspecified FINS node address.
Note
When transferring data through the internet, a global IP address must be
acquired for the Ethernet Unit.
1-2 Functions Listed by Purpose
Timing and
direction
User purpose
Communications
service
Method
Restrictions
User-specified tim- Reading and writing
ing, sent from com- data in the CPU Unit's Function
Mail Receive
IOMRead (I/O memory read) and The maximum data
IOMWrite (I/O memory write) com- size is 6,000
puter
I/O memory
mands
words.
Changing the CPU
ChangeMode command
---
Unit's operating mode
Performing operations
on EM file memory or
a Memory Card
installed in the CPU
Unit
FileWrite, FileRead, FileDelete,
and FileList commands
The maximum data
size is 1 MB.
Backing up the user
program or parameter
area in the CPU Unit
UMBackup (User program backup) ---
and PARAMBackup (Parameter
area backup) commands
Reading or clearing
the error log in the
Ethernet Unit or CPU
Unit
ErrorLogRead and ErrorLogClear ---
commands
Sending a specific
FINS command to a
specific Unit
FinsSend command
---
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Protocols
Section 1-3
Timing and
direction
User purpose
Communications
service
Method
Restrictions
Automatic execu-
tion when a preset CPU Unit's I/O mem-
condition is met,
sent to computer
(See note.)
Reading data in the
Mail Send Func-
tion
Specify a data file as an attached The maximum data
file and specify the starting read
address and number of words.
size is 6,000
words.
ory
Reading data from a
Memory Card installed
in the CPU Unit
Specify any file as an attached file. The maximum data
size is 1 MB.
Receiving a user-
defined message as
an e-mail
Store the desired message in
ASCII in the CPU Unit's I/O mem- message length is
ory.
The maximum
1,024 characters
(alphanumeric
characters only).
User-specified tim- Performing operations FTP Server Func- Login to the Ethernet Unit from the The data size is not
ing, sent from com- on EM file memory or tion FTP client software and send the restricted. The IP
puter
a Memory Card
installed in the CPU
Unit
FTP command.
address for the
Ethernet Unit must
be private and
fixed.
Reading and writing
data in the CPU Unit's Function
I/O memory from a
Socket Service
Socket service operations can be The IP address for
executed by executing the CMND the Ethernet Unit
instruction or setting control bits in must be private
general application
the PLC.
and fixed.
(not using FINS com-
munications)
Performed at a set Automatically correct- Automatic Clock
Install the SNTP server in the net- ---
work and schedule the synchroni-
zation time in the Ethernet Unit.
time every day or
from the ladder
program
ing the PLC's internal Adjust Function
clock
Temporarily con-
necting a computer operations on the CPU tions
Performing online
FINS communica- One function stores the counter-
The IP address for
part FINS nodes' connection infor- the Ethernet Unit
to perform opera-
tions from a FINS
application such as
the CX-Program-
mer
Unit
mation. Another function
automatically assigns node
addresses.
must be private
and fixed.
Performing opera-
tions from two or
more FINS appli-
cations in the com-
puter
A function supports simultaneous ---
online connections of multiple
applications in the computer.
Note
Any one of the following conditions can be specified to send e-mail automati-
cally:
A periodic timer times out, the Mail Send Switch is turned from OFF to ON, a
specified word contains a particular value, a specified bit turns from OFF to
ON, the CPU Unit's operating mode changes, a fatal error occurs, or an event
is stored in the error log.
1-3 Table of Protocols
Communications
service
Protocol used
Situation when used
CX-
Reference
Programmer's
Unit setting tag
name
Mail Send Function
SMTP
POP
Required
SMTP
POP
SECTION 2Mail
Send Function
When using “POP before SMTP”
DNS
When specifying the SMTP server and
POP server by host names
DNS
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Protocol Settings
Section 1-4
Communications
service
Protocol used
Situation when used
CX-
Reference
Programmer's
Unit setting tag
name
Mail Receive Function SMTP
Required
Required
SMTP
POP
SECTION 3
Receive Mail
Function
POP
DNS
When specifying the SMTP server and
POP server by host names
DNS
FTP Server Function
FTP
Optional
User set
Socket Service Func- TCP/IP
Optional
Optional
Required
User set
User set
SECTION 6
tion
UDP/IP
Automatic Clock
Adjust Function
SNTP
Automatic clock SECTION 5
Adjustment
Function
DNS
When specifying the SNTP server by a
host name
DNS
Creating a FINS com- FINS
munications host
application
Optional
User set
Using FINS
Communica-
tions to Create
Host Applica-
tions
1-4 Common Protocol Settings
1-4-1 SMTP
The SMTP server settings must be made in order to use the Mail Send Func-
tion or Mail Receive Function.
Item
Contents
Set the mail address for the Ethernet Unit. None
IP Address
Default
Local mail address
Server specification Select whether the SMTP server used for
type
sending mail is to be specified by IP
address or the host's domain name (i.e.,
host name).
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Protocol Settings
Section 1-4
Item
IP Address
Contents
Default
Set the IP address for the SMTP server
used for sending mail.
0.0.0.0
This setting is enabled only when “IP
address” is selected as the method for
specifying the server.
Host name
Port No.
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host
name) for the SMTP server that is to be
used for sending mail.
None
This setting is enabled only when “host
name” is selected as the method for speci-
fying the server.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the
SMTP server that is to be used for sending (No. 25 is used.)
mail.
0
This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Use POP before
SMTP
Select whether or not to use the mail receiv- Disabled
ing method (POP before SMTP) in which
the POP server must be accessed (to
receive mail) before the SMTP server is
accessed (to send mail).
Note
The “POP before SMTP” is an authentication function required when sending
mail (using the SMTP server). Normally, account name and password authen-
tication is performed with the POP server because there isn't an authentica-
tion process in the SMTP server. Most ISPs (Internet Service Providers) use
the “POP before SMTP” authentication method to verify users sending e-mail.
1-4-2 POP
Always enter the POP server settings when using the Mail Receive Function.
Also, set the POP server settings when using “POP before SMTP” in the Mail
Send Function.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Protocol Settings
Section 1-4
Item
Contents
Default
Server specification Select whether the POP3 server used for
IP Address
type
receiving mail is to be specified by IP
address or the host's domain name (i.e.,
host name).
IP Address
Set the IP address for the POP3 server
used for receiving mail.
0.0.0.0
None
This setting is enabled only when “IP
address” is selected as the method for
specifying the server.
Host name
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host
name) for the POP3 server that is to be
used for receiving mail.
This setting is enabled only when “host
name” is selected as the method for speci-
fying the server.
Port No.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the
POP3 server that is to be used for receiving (Number 110 is
0
mail.
used.)
This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
Account Name
Sets the account name (up to 9 characters) None
of the account used to send and receive e-
mail.
Only alphanumeric characters can be used.
If no account name is set, the portion of the
local e-mail address to the left of the @ will
be used. In this case, the number of charac-
ters in the account name is not restricted.
Mail password
Sets the password (up to 8 characters) of
the account used to send and receive e-
mail.
None
Server access inter- Set the interval for sending and receiving
0
val time
mail. Mail will be automatically sent and
received at the interval set here.
(5 minutes)
1-4-3 DNS
The DNS server's settings must be entered when the POP3 server, SMTP
server, and SNTP server are specified with host names.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Protocol Settings
Section 1-4
The DNS server manages the IP addresses and host names of the nodes that
communicate in the network. The Ethernet Unit automatically acquires each
server's IP address from the DNS server and uses those acquired IP
addresses.
Item
IP Address
Contents
Default
None
Set the IP address for the DNS server.
Port No.
Set the port to be used for connecting to the
DNS server. Normally, the default setting is (Number 53 is
0
used.
used.)
Retry Timer
Set the time to elapse before retrying when
a connection to the DNS server fails. Nor-
mally, the default setting is used.
0
(Sets 10 sec-
onds.)
Units: Seconds
Number of retries: Fixed at 3
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Protocol Settings
Section 1-4
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 2
Mail Send Function
This section provides an overview and describes how to use the Ethernet Unit’s Mail Send Function, including application
2-1 Mail Send Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Comparison with the Earlier Mail Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 Mail Send Function's Compatibility with Earlier Models . . . . . . . .
2-2 Mail Send Function Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Contents of E-mail Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Contents of E-mail Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Attached File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4 Summary of E-mail Body Information and Attached Files . . . . . . .
2-3 Mail Send Function Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Function Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Details of the Available Mail Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Using the Mail Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2 Settings Required for the Mail Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 Mail Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-4 Send Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 Mail Send Function Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1 Send Mail Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-2 Mail Send Switch, Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag . . . . . . .
2-6 I/O Memory Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 Attached File Transfer Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8 Mail Send Function Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8-1 Identifying and Correcting Mail Send Function Errors . . . . . . . . . .
2-8-2 Troubleshooting Mail Send Errors with LED Indicators . . . . . . . . .
2-8-3 Error Log Error Codes for the Mail Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9 Example Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9-1 Step 1. Create the I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9-2 Step 2. Make the Unit Setup Settings from the CX-Programmer. . .
2-9-3 Step 3. Transfer the CPU Bus Unit Setup Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9-4 Step 4. Automatic Transmission when Send Condition is Satisfied.
10
10
11
11
11
12
13
15
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
21
21
24
24
25
26
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
32
32
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Overview
Section 2-1
2-1 Mail Send Function Overview
2-1-1 Introduction
The Mail Send Function sends an e-mail from the Ethernet Unit to a specified
e-mail address when a predetermined condition occurs in the PLC.
Data in the CPU Unit's I/O memory areas (or any file in the Memory Card) can
be sent as an attached file.
In addition, user-set ASCII information as well as the Ethernet Unit's error log
and status information can be sent as text in the body of the e-mail.
User
SMTP server
E-mail
Internet or
intranet
E-mail reception
Router
E-mail
Sent automatically when
preset condition is met.
Ethernet
Body: User
information,
error log, or
Unit status
Ethernet Unit
Attached file:
Specified I/O memory
file in CPU Unit
I/O memory
The Ethernet Unit converts the
specified I/O memory data to a file.
Advantages
A specific range of I/O memory data in the CPU Unit can be sent automati-
cally as an attached file (through the internet or intranet) when a particular
condition occurs. Some conditions that can be used are a bit turning ON to
indicate an error, a specified word containing a given value, or a periodic time
being reached.
E-mails can be sent when various conditions in the existing ladder program
are met. It is not necessary to modify the existing ladder program.
The Mail Send Function can be used to create various applications such as
error monitoring of remote equipment, periodic monitoring of equipment, and
quality control applications.
Description
When a specified sending condition is met, the following e-mail body data and
attached files can be sent automatically as an e-mail to the e-mail address
specified in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.
■ Body Data
Any desired combination of user-set information (any ASCII character string),
error log information, and status information can be sent.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
■ Attached Files
An I/O memory data file created automatically by the Ethernet Unit (a speci-
fied range of the CPU Unit's I/O memory data converted to a .IOM, .TXT, or
.CSV file) or any file in file memory (in the CPU Unit's Memory Card) can be
sent as an attached file.
■ Send Timing
An e-mail can be sent automatically when a dedicated control bit goes from
OFF to ON, a specified word's value meets a preset condition, a specified bit's
status changes, an entry is recorded in the Ethernet Unit's error log, the CPU
Unit's status changes (a non-fatal error occurs, a fatal error occurs, or the
operating mode changes), or at periodic intervals.
■ Send Mail Conditions
Up to 8 send mail conditions can be preset to send an e-mail automatically
when the specified conditions are met. Conditions include the send destina-
tion, trigger type, I/O memory addresses to be converted to a data file or the
name of the file to be read from file memory, and periodic sending interval.
2-1-2 Comparison with the Earlier Mail Send Function
Item
Model
Earlier version
Current version
CS1W/CJ1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01/11
and CJ1W-ETN11
Not supported.
Attached file
Supported.
A range of I/O memory data can be con-
verted to a data file and attached, a file in a
Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit can
be attached, or a file in the CPU Unit's EM
file memory can be attached.
Send mail con- Any of the following: Any of the following:
ditions
A dedicated control
bit (the Mail Send
Switch) goes OFF to
ON, the status of the
Ethernet Unit
changes (an entry is
recorded in the error
log), periodic timer
• A dedicated control bit (Mail Send Switch)
goes OFF-to-ON.
• A specified word's value changes (=, <>,
<, <=, >=, or > condition).
• A specific bit changes (OFF-to-ON or ON-
to-OFF).
• Ethernet Unit changes (entry in error log).
• CPU Unit changes (non-fatal error occurs,
fatal error occurs, or operating mode
changes).
• Periodic timer
2-1-3 Mail Send Function's Compatibility with Earlier Models
When a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 is used to replace a CS1W-ETN01/
11 or CJ1W-ETN11 Ethernet Unit in an application, the Unit's functions are
downwardly compatible if the following status bits are used.
ETN01/11
ETN21
User mail send status
Periodic mail send status
Error mail send status
Status of send condition setting 5
Status of send condition setting 6
Status of send condition setting 7
2-2 Mail Send Function Details
The Mail Send Function can send information in the body of the e-mail as well
as in an attached file.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
2-2-1 Contents of E-mail Body
Date and time
Ethernet Unit's e-mail address
Date: Fri, 1 Jan 2004 13:00:00 +0900
From: [email protected]
Message-Id: <[email protected]>
Destination e-mail address
Subject: OMRON Ethernet Unit Mail Service (posted at regular intervals)
Content-Type: text/plain; charset=US-ASCII
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit
Title (depends on trigger condition)
Content-Type (fixed)
Trigger Setting Number = 1
This is OMRON ethernet unit mail posting service.
This mail have been posted at regular intervals.
Trigger number (required)
Trigger information (required)
======================================================================
Ethernet Unit Identification
======================================================================
Ethernet Unit model (required)
Model
Version
IP address
Subnet mask
IP conversion : Table used
: CS1W-ETN21
: VX.XX
: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Unit version (required)
Ethernet Unit IP address (required)
======================================================================
User Message
======================================================================
TEST MAIL.
User-set information (optional)
Error log information (optional)
======================================================================
Error Log Information
======================================================================
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS Error Detail Description
-------- --------
03/05/29 12:00:00
03/05/29 12:30:00
----
0006
0121
----
0000
0101
------------------------------------
CPU unit error
Destination IP address not registered
======================================================================
Status Information
======================================================================
*Error Status
IP router table error
IP address setting error
IP address table error
Routing table error
Address mismatch
EEP-ROM error
POP server error
SMTP server error
SNTP server error
DNS server error
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
: OFF
-----------------------------------------------------
*UDP Socket Connection Status
UDP Socket No.1 connection status : Opened
UDP Socket No.2 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.3 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.4 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.5 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.6 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.7 connection status : Closed
UDP Socket No.8 connection status : Closed
-----------------------------------------------------
*TCP Socket Connection Status
Status information (optional)
TCP Socket No.1 connection status : Established
TCP Socket No.2 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.3 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.4 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.5 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.6 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.7 connection status : Closed
TCP Socket No.8 connection status : Closed
-----------------------------------------------------
*Number Information
Total number of receive packets
Total number of receive errors
Total number of send packets
Total number of send errors
Total number of send collisions
:
:
:
:
:
123,456
0
234,567
0
0
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
2-2-2 Contents of E-mail Body
Ethernet Unit's Status
Information Header
The following header information is included.
•Subject:
OMRON Ethernet Unit Mail Service
(Indicates trigger condition. See
note.)
•Content-Type:
text/plain;charset=US-ASCII
•Content-Transfer-Encoding:7bit
Note The following trigger conditions are available.
Trigger condition
Text entered as subject
posted by user request
Software switch
Change in specified posted at changing channel value(= flag)
word's contents
posted at changing channel value(<> flag)
posted at changing channel value(< flag)
posted at changing channel value(<= flag)
posted at changing channel value(>= flag)
posted at changing channel value(> flag)
Change in specified posted at rising edge of bit
bit
posted at falling edge of bit
Change in ETN Unit posted at error occurrence
Change in CPU Unit posted at changing CPU mode
posted at CPU error occurrence(FAL)
posted at CPU error occurrence(FALS)
Periodic timer
posted at regular intervals
Trigger Information
The trigger information is always included in the e-mail.
• Trigger number: 1 to 8
• Shared message: “This is OMRON ethernet unit mail posting
service.”
• Trigger-specific messages: The following messages are displayed.
Trigger
condition
Trigger-specific message in e-mail header
Software switch This mail have been posted by user request
Change in
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(=
specified word's flag)
contents (See
note.)
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(<>
flag)
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(<
flag)
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(<=
flag)
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(>=
flag)
This mail have been posted at changing channel value(>
flag)
Change in
specified bit's
status
This mail have been posted at rising edge of bit
This mail have been posted at falling edge of bit
Change in ETN This mail have been posted at error occurrence
Unit
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
Trigger
condition
Trigger-specific message in e-mail header
Change in CPU This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (PRG-
Unit
>MON)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (PRG-
>RUN)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (MON-
>PRG)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (MON-
>RUN)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (RUN-
>PRG)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode (RUN-
>MON)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode
(PowerON->PRG)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode
(PowerON->MON)
This mail have been posted at changing CPU mode
(PowerON->RUN)
This mail have been posted at CPU error occurrence(FAL)
This mail have been posted at CPU error occurrence(FALS)
This mail have been posted at regular intervals
Periodic timer
Note Another sentence will be attached indicating how the specified
word's value has changed: “Channel data has changed from XX to
XX.”
Ethernet Unit Information
The Ethernet Unit information is always included in the e-mail.
• Model
• Version
• IP address (decimal notation)
• Subnet mask (decimal notation)
• IP address conversion method
Optional Information
The optional information that can be included in the e-mail body is listed
below.
Different information can be selected with each mail trigger, and more than
one type of information can be selected. (The selections are specified in the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup.) If no optional information is selected, the e-mail
will not be sent even when the trigger condition is met.
■ User-set Information
User-set information is ASCII text set by the user in the CPU Unit's memory.
Up to 1,024 bytes of data can be sent from the user-set mail data address set
in the CPU Bus Unit Area.
Note (a) The user-set message sent in each e-mail can be changed just
by changing the contents of the relevant words in the CPU Bus
Unit Area. To change the user-set message easily, prepare sev-
eral messages in advance and copy the desired message to the
CPU Bus Unit Area when it is required.
The data set by the user is sent just as it is, and the code is not
converted.
(b) If there is a null code character (00 Hex) in the data, only the data
up to that point will be sent.
(c) The user-set data is sent as-is and the codes are not converted.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
■ Error Log Information
The error log information includes all of the data stored in the Ethernet Unit's
error log. The error log can contain up to 64 records. For details on the error
log, refer to 8-3 Error Log in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks
(W420).
■ Status Information
The following Ethernet Unit data is sent.
1. Open/closed status of UDP sockets 1 to 8
2. TCP status of TCP sockets 1 to 8
3. Unit error information
4. Counter information
Total number of receive packets, total number of receive errors, total num-
ber of send packets, total number of send errors, total number of send col-
lisions
2-2-3 Attached File Details
Files that can be attached to e-mails are broadly divided into the following 2
groups.
• I/O memory data (IOM, TXT, and CSV formats)
• File data
Only one file can be attached to each e-mail.
I/O Memory Data (6,000
Words Max.)
When it is time to send the e-mail, the Ethernet Unit reads the specified
amount of data starting at the specified I/O memory address in the CPU Unit,
creates a file with that data, and sends the file with the e-mail as an attach-
ment.
Files can be created with filename extension “.IOM”, “.TXT”, or “.CSV”. These
are CS/CJ Series file memory function files.
Extension
Content
.IOM
This is a binary file containing the specified number of words starting at
the specified address. The words must be in the same data area.
.TXT
.CSV
This is a tab-delimited text file containing the specified number of words
starting at the specified address. The words must be in the same data
area.
This is a comma-delimited text file containing the specified number of
words starting at the specified address. The words must be in the same
data area.
Data when send condition
is established.
Example
D00100
D00101
D00102 9 A B C
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
I/O memory
One area (Example: DM)
to
to
Sends e-mail.
Ethernet
Start word: D00100
End word: D00119
Automatically created by Ethernet Unit
Example: CSV file
Specified amount of comma-separated data
starting from the specified starting word
Data size:
E.g., 20
Data file:
1234,5678,9ABC
Example: DATA0.CSV
E-mail
Sent as an attached file.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Details
Section 2-2
• Since the Ethernet Unit creates the data file automatically, the Accessing
Memory/Sending Mail Flag (bit 01 of n+17 in the allocated CPU Bus Unit
Area) will be ON while the CPU Unit's I/O memory is being accessed.
• To maintain the integrity of the data, write-protect the region of I/O mem-
ory being converted to a data file by preventing the region from being writ-
ten from the ladder program while this flag is ON.
File Data (1 MB Max.)
Any file stored in the Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit (root directory
MEMCARD) can be sent with the e-mail as an attached file.
Sends e-mail.
Ethernet
Any file in the
Memory Card
Send any Windows file or a CS/CJ
format file such as a user program file
(.OBJ) or parameter file (.STD).
Memory Card
E-mail
Sent as an attached file.
• Generally, CS/CJ file memory files are attached, such as program files
(.OBJ), parameter files (.STD), and data files stored in the Memory Card
(.IOM, .TXT, or .CSV).
2-2-4 Summary of E-mail Body Information and Attached Files
Data sent
Body/Attached file
E-mail body Attached file
User-set information ASCII text
(Set in the CPU Unit's I/O
memory by the user.)
Ethernet Unit's error ASCII text
---
---
---
log
(Generated automatically by
the Ethernet Unit.)
Ethernet Unit's sta-
tus information
ASCII text
(Generated automatically by
the Ethernet Unit.)
I/O memory data (up ---
to 6,000 words)
The Ethernet Unit automati-
cally creates the data file
(.IOM, .CSV, or .TXT) when
the mail send condition (trig-
ger setting) is established.
File data (Up to
1 MB)
---
Specify any file in the Memory
Card installed in the CPU
Unit.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Specifications
Section 2-3
2-3 Mail Send Function Specifications
2-3-1 Function Specifications
Item
Specifications
Destination e-mail address
Up to 2 addresses can be registered in the Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup) and
the addresses can be up to 50 characters long.
Subject
Body
Fixed text (Depends on the trigger condition.)
User-set information (up to 1,024 bytes), the Ethernet Unit's error log, and the Ethernet
Unit's status information can be included individually or in any combination.
Attached
file
Data format
Any one of the following files can be selected in the Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System
Setup).
• I/O memory data
When the mail send condition is established, the data starting at the specified address in
the CPU Unit's I/O memory is automatically converted to a data file (.IOM, .TXT, or
.CSV) and sent as an attachment.
• File data
A Windows file with any filename extension
Data size
Format
• I/O memory data: Up to 6,000 words (The max. size is the same for all file types.)
• File data: Up to 1 MB
MIME (version 1.0) format
Only 1 allowed
Number of
attachments
Mail triggers
The mail triggers can be selected in the Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup).
1. OFF to ON transition of a dedicated control bit (the Mail Send Switch)
2. Change in the value of a specified word (=, <>, <, <=, >=, or >)
3. Change in the status of a specified bit (OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF transition)
4. Change in the Ethernet Unit (event entered into the error log)
5. Change in the CPU Unit (non-fatal error occurred, fatal error occurred, or operating
mode changed)
6. Periodic timer
Note Set the monitoring interval when using triggers 2 and 3. Set the sending interval
when using trigger 6.
Number of mail triggers
Up to 8 triggers can be set and operated simultaneously.
Contents of send mail condi- Make the following settings in the Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup):
tion settings 1 to 8
• E-mail body information (user-set information, error log, and status information)
• Attached file type (any file in file memory or data file with filename extension .IOM, .TXT,
or .CSV), attached file name
• Mail trigger type (set trigger types listed above for triggers 1 to 8, trigger data address,
and word comparison set value)
• Starting address of user-set information
• Starting address of attached I/O memory data and number of words
• Time interval (Set for mail trigger 2 change in value of specified word, mail trigger 3
change in status of specified bit, or mail trigger 6 periodic timer)
Sending method
(encoding)
Subject:
Body:
Attached file: Base64
Us ASCII
Us ASCII (Information types 2 through 4 can be sent in the body.)
Encryption
None
None
Compression
Protocols used
SMTP (port number 25: can be changed with the CX-Programmer Unit Setup)
(The POP before SMTP method can also be set.)
Mail send status
Transmission status information such as mail being sent, normal completion, and error
completion is indicated for each of the 8 send mail condition settings in words m (Mail Sta-
tus 1) and m+17 (Mail Status 2) in the DM Area words allocated to the Ethernet Unit as a
CPU Bus Unit.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
2-3-2 Details of the Available Mail Triggers
Classification
Trigger type
User-set
Trigger when a specified word in the CPU Unit's I/O memory
becomes equal to a set value.
Trigger when a specified word in the CPU Unit's I/O memory
becomes greater than a set value.
Trigger when a specified word in the CPU Unit's I/O memory
becomes less than a set value.
Trigger when a specified bit in the CPU Unit's I/O memory goes
from OFF to ON.
Trigger when a specified bit in the CPU Unit's I/O memory goes
from ON to OFF.
Change in sta-
tus
Trigger when an event is registered in the Ethernet Unit's error log.
Trigger when an error occurs in the Ethernet Unit.
Trigger when a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit.
Trigger when a non-fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit.
Trigger when the CPU Unit's operating mode (RUN, MONITOR, or
PROGRAM) changes.
Periodic inter-
vals
Trigger once every 10 minutes to 10 days (14,400 minutes).
2-4 Using the Mail Send Function
2-4-1 Procedure
1.
Make the basic settings.
For details, refer to Section 2 Installation and Initial Setup in the Operation Manual Con-
struction of Networks.
↓
2.
Connect the CX-Programmer online and make the following settings in the Unit Setup
(CPU Bus Unit System Setup):
• SMTP Tab (required)
• POP Tab (when the Use POP before SMTP option is selected)
• DNS Tab (when using a host name)
• Mail Address Tab (Register one or two destination e-mail addresses.)
• Send Mail Tab (Register up to 8 send mail conditions and corresponding send data.)
↓
3.
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button to transfer the
Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup) to the CPU Unit. (The settings data will be
transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area.)
↓
4.
5.
When the preset condition is established, an e-mail will be sent automatically to the
specified destination address(es).
↓
The Send Mail Status (words m and m+17 of the allocated DM Area words) can be
checked from the ladder program when necessary.
Note To preserve the simultaneity of the data when a data file is being sent as an
attachment, add a condition to write processes in the ladder program so that the
region of memory being converted to a data file is not overwritten from the ladder
program while memory is being accessed (mail is being sent). Bit 01 of word
n+17 in the allocated CIO Area words will be ON while the relevant memory is
being accessed.
Note
The Ethernet Unit will be restarted when the settings data is transferred to the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area, so that the new settings are read and
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
become effective. Verify that it is safe for the Ethernet Unit to restart before
transferring the settings data.
2-4-2 Settings Required for the Mail Send Function
The following Unit settings must be made when using the Mail Send Function.
CX-
Programmer
Unit Setup
Tab
Setting
Setting requirement
Reference
SMTP
Server specification Required.
type
1-4 Common
Protocol Settings
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
One or the other is required, depending on the Server specifi-
cation type setting.
Rarely required (when a setting other than the default setting of
25 is required).
Local mail address
Required.
Use POP before
SMTP
Required when the account must be authenticated with POP3
before sending mail.
POP
Server specification Required.
(See note 1.) type
IP Address
One or the other is required, depending on the server specifica-
tion method setting.
Host name
Port No.
Rarely required (when a setting other than the default setting of
110 is required).
Account Name
Mail password
Required when the account name is different from the name up
to the @ symbol in the e-mail address.
Required.
Server access inter- Optional (Change when the default setting of 5 minutes is unac-
val time
ceptable.)
DNS
(See note 2.)
IP Address
Port No.
Required.
Rarely required (when a setting other than the default setting of
53 is required).
Retry timer
Optional (Change when the default setting of 10 seconds is
unacceptable.)
Mail Address Mail address 1
Mail address 2
At least one e-mail address must be entered (mail address 1 or page 21
2).
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
CX-
Programmer
Unit Setup
Tab
Setting
Setting requirement
Reference
Send Mail
(Send mail
conditions1to
8)
Trigger type
One type must be selected.
page 21
• Rising edge of the Mail Send Switch: Select the Software
switch Option.
• Change in specified word's value: Select the Word value
change Option and specify the Area, Address, Value, and
State.
• Change in specified bit's status: Select the Bit value change
Option and specify the Area, Address, Bit, and State.
• Entry in Ethernet Unit's error log: Select the ETN condition
Option.
• Change in CPU Unit status: Select the CPU condition Option.
• Sending mail at periodic intervals: Select the Periodic timer
Option.
Interval time
Required when the trigger type is set to Word value change, Bit
value change, or Periodic timer.
Mail address (desti- Required.
nation)
Send user data
Required to send a user-set ASCII message in the e-mail body.
Send Error Log infor- Required to send the error log information in the e-mail body.
mation
Send status informa- Required to send the Ethernet Unit's status in the e-mail body.
tion
IO memory data
Required when the Send file data/IO memory data Option has
been selected and a data file is being attached (IO data (IOM),
IO data (CSV), or IO data (TXT)).
Attached file name
Required when the Send file data/IO memory data Option has
been selected.
Note
(1) Make POP settings when the Use POP before SMTP Option was select-
ed in the SMTP Tab.
(2) Make DNS settings when the Server specification type is set to Host
name in the SMTP or POP Tab.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
2-4-3 Mail Address
Set up to 2 destination mail addresses.
Item
Contents
Default
Mail address 1 Set one of the addresses to which the Ethernet Unit None
is to send mail. (Up to two addresses can be set.)
Mail address 2
Each mail address can be up to 50 characters long.
Note: Mail can be sent to multiple addresses by
punctuating the mail address with commas.
For example, the following mail address entry will
send the e-mail to [email protected] and
2-4-4 Send Mail
Set the following settings for send mail conditions 1 to 8.
When a send mail condition or multiple conditions are met, the corresponding
e-mail(s) will be sent automatically.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
Send Mail Condition Settings
Item
Trigger No.
Contents
Default
Select a number as the trigger condition for
sending mail. Up to eight trigger numbers can be
registered.
None
Send mail upon Sets whether or not the selected mail trigger is Not selected
trigger
to be enabled.
Mail Address Specification (Required)
Item
Mail address
Contents
Default
Select whether the e-mail will be sent to destina- Address 1
tion mail address 1 or destination mail address
2.
Data Sent by Mail (When Required)
■ Data Sent in E-mail Body
Select whether the user-set ASCII information, Ethernet Unit's error log, and/
or Ethernet Unit's status information will be sent in the e-mail body.
Item
Contents
Default
Send user data If this option is selected, user-created data is
sent in the body of the mail.
Not selected
User-defined
mail address
When the Send user data Option is selected
Area: CIO
(enabled), this address specifies the leading I/O Address: 0
memory address where the user-set ASCII data
is stored.
Up to 1,024 bytes of data can be stored at this
address and sent in the e-mail. The data will be
sent up to the first null code character (00 Hex)
in the user-set data, so if there is a null code
character in the data the e-mail data will end at
that point.
In addition, the user-set data will be sent as-is
and codes will not be converted.
Send Error Log Selects whether or not the Ethernet Unit's error Not selected
information
log will be included in the body of the e-mail.
Send status
information
Selects whether or not status information will be Not selected
included in the body of the e-mail.
■ Data Sent in an Attached File
These settings specify whether a file will be attached to the e-mail as well as
the contents of the attached file if one is being attached.
Item
Contents
Default
Send file data or This option selects whether or not a file will be
Not selected
I/O memory
data
attached to the e-mail.
Attached file
type
Select one of the following file types.
• I/O data (.IOM)
File data
• I/O data (.TXT)
• I/O data (.CSV)
• File data (any file in file memory)
IO memory data If an I/O data file (.IOM, .TXT, or .CSV) is
selected as the attached file type, this setting
Area: CIO
Address: 0
specifies the leading address where the data is Size: 1
stored and the number of words of data that the
Ethernet Unit will convert to a file.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Send Function
Section 2-4
■ Attached File Name
Item
Contents
Default
Attached file
name
If the above setting is checked so that files can None
be sent as attachments, then specify the name
of the file that is to be sent.
I/O data file The data file will be created auto-
selected
matically with the file name
entered in this field.
Note Even if a filename extension
is entered, it will be ignored.
The Unit automatically adds
the appropriate extension
(.IOM, .TXT, or .CSV).
Filedata file The file with the specified filename
selected
will be read from the Memory
Card's root directory and attached
to the e-mail.
Note The file must be located in
the Memory Card's root
directory in order to be sent
as an attachment.
Send Mail Trigger Type
Setting (Required)
Specifies the type send mail condition that will be used by the Ethernet Unit to
automatically send e-mail.
When the Mail Send Function is not being used, disable the send mail upon
trigger setting.
Note
The same trigger type can be set for two or more trigger numbers (1 to 8).
Item
Contents
Default
Software switch If this option is selected, an e-mail is sent when- Selected
ever the Mail Send Switch goes from OFF to
ON.
The Mail Send Switch is bit 03 of word n in the
CIO Area words allocated to the Ethernet Unit
as a CPU Bus Unit. (n = 1500 + 25 × unit num-
ber)
Word value
change
If this option is selected, the value of a specified Not selected
word is compared with a set value with the
selected comparison function (=, <>, <, <=, >=,
or >), and an e-mail is sent whenever the condi-
tion is satisfied.
Specify the desired word address in the drop-
down lists.
Bit value change If this option is selected, an e-mail is sent when- Not selected
ever the specified bit goes from OFF-to-ON or
ON-to-OFF. Specify the desired bit address in
the drop-down lists.
ETN condition
If this option is selected, an e-mail is sent when- Not selected
ever a new error is stored in the Ethernet Unit's
error log.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Status
Section 2-5
Item
Contents
Default
CPU condition
If this option is selected, mail is sent whenever
any of the following conditions occur at the CPU
Unit.
Not selected
Use the drop-down list at the right to select one
of the following three conditions as the mail trig-
ger.
• When a non-fatal error occurs
• When a fatal error occurs
• When the operating mode is changed
Periodic timer
If this option is selected, an e-mail is sent at
fixed time intervals. The time interval is set in 10-
minute units in the Interval time box. (The mini-
mum interval is 10 minutes.)
Not selected
Note
The Area and Address setting ranges are as follows:
CIO Area: 0 to 6143; Work Area: W000 to W511; Holding Area: H000 to
H511; Auxiliary Area: A000 to A447; Timer PVs: T0000 to T4095; Counter
PVs: C0000 to C4095; DM Area: D00000 to D32767; EM Area: 0 to 32767 in
each bank
Interval Time Setting
(For Periodic timer, Word value change, and Bit value change Triggers)
Item
Contents
Sets the time interval between Selected
selected as the e-mails.
Default
Interval time
Periodic timer
trigger type
1 to 1,440 (10 to 14,400 min-
utes)
Units: 10-minute units
Default: 0000
Word value
change or Bit
value change
Sets the interval at which the
word/bit contents are com-
pared.
selected as the 1 to 1,000 (1 to 1,000 s)
trigger type
Units: 1 s
Default: 0000
2-5 Mail Send Function Status
2-5-1 Send Mail Status
The following two Send Mail Status words are located in the DM Area words
allocated to the Ethernet Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.
The leading address (m) of the allocated DM area depends on the Ethernet
Unit's unit number (m = D30000 + 100 × unit number).
■ Send Mail Status 1
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
m
Status of Send Condition Setting 1
Status of Send Condition Setting 2
Status of Send Condition Setting 3
Status of Send Condition Setting 4
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Status
Section 2-5
■ Send Mail Status 2
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
m+17
Status of Send Condition Setting 5
Status of Send Condition Setting 6
Status of Send Condition Setting 7
Status of Send Condition Setting 8
The transmission status of each send condition is indicated by the content of
the corresponding 3 bits in Send Mail Status 1 or Send Mail Status 2, as
shown in the following table.
Bit numbers
Status
02
06
10
14
01
05
09
13
00
04
08
12
0
0
0
• Mail is either waiting to be sent or the send condition is
satisfied.
AND
• Mail hasn't been sent even once since the PLC was
turned ON or the Ethernet Unit was restarted.
0
0
0
1
1
0
Mail is being sent.
• Mail is either waiting to be sent or the send condition is
satisfied.
AND
• The last mail transmission was completed normally.
1
1
0
1
• Mail is either waiting to be sent or the send condition is
satisfied.
AND
• An error occurred in the last mail transmission.
Mail transmission disabled. (Mail cannot be sent.)
1
1
0: OFF, 1: ON
While mail is being sent, the status of the three bits for the send condition will
be 001. (For example, word m bits 02, 01, and 00 will be 001 when mail is
being sent for send condition setting 1). If the transmission ends normally, the
status of the three bits becomes 010. If the transmission ends with an error,
the status becomes 110.
Check this transmission status in the ladder program as required.
2-5-2 Mail Send Switch, Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag
The Mail Send Switch and Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag are located
in the CIO Area words allocated to the Ethernet Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.
The leading address (n) of the allocated CIO area depends on the Ethernet
Unit's unit number (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number).
■ Mail Send Switch (Bit 03 of n)
When the Mail Send Function's mail trigger type is set to Software switch, the
Ethernet Unit will send an e-mail when this switch goes from OFF to ON.
The Mail Send Switch is turned OFF automatically when the mail transmis-
sion is completed.
Note
Turning the switch OFF directly has no effect, even if the switch is turned OFF
while mail is being sent.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Memory Data Formats
Section 2-6
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
n
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Mail Send Switch
■ Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag (Bit 01 of n+17)
When a data file (IOM, TXT, or CSV) is being attached to the e-mail, the
Ethernet Unit will access the CPU Unit's I/O memory and automatically create
the data file when the e-mail is being sent. The Accessing Memory/Sending
Mail Flag (bit 01 of n+17) will be ON while the CPU Unit's memory is being
accessed.
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
n+17
-
-
Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag
To maintain the uniformity of the data in the data file, use this flag as a condi-
tion for write operations in the ladder program to prevent the ladder program
from overwriting the data while it is being converted to a data file.
2-6 I/O Memory Data Formats
IOM Format
When 5 words of hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) are
being sent as an attached file in IOM format, the data is stored in the attached
file as shown in the following diagram.
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
IOM file contents
XX XX
XX 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE F0 12 34
48 bytes
(Reserved for system)
Note
The IOM file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to binary data for-
mat.
TXT Format
When hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) is being sent
as an attached file in TXT format, the data is stored with the following proce-
dure.
1. The word data is converted to ASCII.
2. The word data is delimited by hard tabs ([HT]: 09).
3. A return and line feed ([CR][LF]: 0D0A) are inserted after every 10 words.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attached File Transfer Times
Section 2-7
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
5678
+0
1234
9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
DEF0
+10 9ABC
TXT file contents
31 32 33 34
35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09
[HT] [HT]
0D 0A 39 41 42 43 09
[CR] [LF] [HT]
09
4
1
2
3
[HT]
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
35 36 37
38
8
5
6
9
A
B
C
7
Contents of TXT file when displayed
1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@
9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0
The @ character represents a hard tab and displayed as a tab in text displays.
Note
The TXT file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to tab-delimited
word format with a carriage return every 10 words.
CSV Format
When hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) is being sent
as an attached file in CSV format, the data is stored with the following proce-
dure.
1. The word data is converted to ASCII.
2. The word data is delimited by commas (“,”: 2C).
3. A return and line feed ([CR][LF]: 0D0A) are inserted after every 10 words.
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
5678
+0
1234
9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
DEF0
+10 9ABC
CSV file contents
31 32 33 34 2C 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C
,
,
,
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
35 36 37
0D 0A 39 41 42 43 2C
38
8
,
5
6
[CR] [LF]
9
A
B
C
7
Contents of CSV file when displayed
1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,
9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0
Note
The CSV file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to comma-delimited
word format with a carriage return every 10 words.
2-7 Attached File Transfer Times
When sending an attached file with the Mail Send Function, the access time
can be as long as 30 or 40 minutes for a very large file. The following tables
show how long the CPU Unit's memory will be accessed by the Ethernet Unit
(how long the Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag will be ON).
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Errors
Section 2-8
■ Access Times for CS1 and CJ1 CPU Units
Command
Data size
CPU Unit's operating mode
PROGRAM
---
RUN
10 ms cycle time
IOM data
File data
1 word
0.1 s
0.3 s
0.3 s
1.3 s
0.1 s
6,000 words
1 KB
0.3 s
1.1 s
10 KB
7.3 s
100 KB
1 MB
10.6 s
72.2 s
1,139.5 s
137.4 s
■ Access Times for CS1-H and CJ1-H CPU Units
Command
Data size
CPU Unit's operating mode
PROGRAM
---
RUN
10 ms cycle time
IOM data
(words)
1 word
0.1 s
0.3 s
0.1 s
0.6 s
5.0 s
0.1 s
6,000 words
1 KB
0.2 s
File data
(bytes)
0.3 s
10 KB
2.0 s
100 KB
1 MB
18.3 s
272.8 s
49.4 s
Note
(1) The access times for file data indicate Memory Card access times.
(2) The access times in the table above are standard times when the PLC
Setup's “Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time” setting is set to the default val-
ue of 4% of the cycle time.
(3) The attached file transfer time can be reduced by increasing the time al-
lowed for peripheral servicing in the PLC Setup's “Fixed Peripheral Ser-
vicing Time” setting.
2-8 Mail Send Function Errors
2-8-1 Identifying and Correcting Mail Send Function Errors
The following table shows the primary causes of e-mail transmission errors
and corresponding solution.
Cause
Correction
The SMTP (DNS or POP) server address Correctly set each server address (IP
has not been set.
address or host name).
POP before SMTP authentication error
Correctly set the POP settings (account
and password).
SMTP (DNS or POP) server communica- Inspect the communications path (Ether-
tions timeout
net Unit, cable connections, hub, router,
and server) and correct any problems or
damage.
Local mail address has not been set.
Correctly set the local mail address.
Destination mail address has not been
set.
Correctly set the destination mail
address.
The trigger is set and the user-set data,
error log, status, and file data/I/O data
settings are all zero.
Correctly set the data to be sent.
Trigger type setting error
Correctly set the trigger type setting.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Send Function Errors
Section 2-8
Cause
Correction
Correctly set the trigger type setting.
Details of trigger setting error
Specified word or specified bit data area/ Correctly set the data area and address
address error for the specified word or bit.
2-8-2 Troubleshooting Mail Send Errors with LED Indicators
RUN
Lit
ERC
---
ERH
Lit
LNK
---
HOST
Probable cause
Correction
Flashing There is an error in the server
Read the Error Status Flags and
(DNS, SMTP, or POP3) settings in error log and correct the setting
the Unit Setup.
that caused the error. If the error
recurs, replace the CPU Unit.
Not lit
---
Flashing • An authentication error occurred • Correctly set the POP settings
in “POP before SMTP” authenti-
cation. A communications prob-
lem occurred with the server.
(account and password).
• Inspect the communications path
(Ethernet Unit, cable connec-
tions, hub, router, and server)
and correct any problems or
damage.
• A network failure occurred in the
communications path and
caused an access timeout.
Note
For more details on the error log, refer to 8-3 Error Log in the Operation Man-
ual Construction of Networks (W420).
2-8-3 Error Log Error Codes for the Mail Send Function
When an error occurs while the Ethernet Unit is operating, the error code,
detailed error code, and time the error occurred are saved in the error log. The
following table provides a list of the error codes.
The error log can be read by sending FINS commands to the Ethernet Unit or
by using the mail receive function and specifying the ErrorLogRead com-
mand.
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
Correction
EEPROM
1st byte
2nd byte
021A
Logic error 00
in setting
table
01: Data link
table
Recreate the data Saved
specified by the
2nd byte of the
detailed error
02: Network
parameters
code.
03: Routing
tables
04: Setup
05: CPU Bus
Unit Words
(CIO/DM)
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example Application
Section 2-9
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte 2nd byte
Correction
EEPROM
03C1
Server set- 00: DNS 01: IP address
Set the server
---
ting error
settings correctly
based on the
information in the
detailed error
code.
01: SMTP 02: Host name
02: POP3 03: Port number
03: SNTP 04: Other
parameters
03C4
Server
connection
error
00: DNS 01: Specified
Take either of the ---
following mea-
sures.
host does not
01: SMTP
exist
02: POP3
02: No service
03: SNTP
• Correct the set-
at specified host tings for each
server.
03: Timeout
• Inspect the com-
munications
04: Closed uni-
laterally by host
path (Ethernet
Unit, cable con-
nections, hub,
router, server),
and correct the
situation that is
causing the
05: Cannot con-
nect because
account infor-
mation does not
match
06: Host name
resolution error
error.
07: Transmis-
sion error
08: Reception
error
09: Other error
Note
For more details on the error log, refer to 8-3 Error Log in the Operation Man-
ual Construction of Networks (W420).
2-9 Example Application
2-9-1 Step 1. Create the I/O Table
Mount the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack, connect online
with the CX-Programmer or Programming Console, and create the I/O table.
2-9-2 Step 2. Make the Unit Setup Settings from the CX-Programmer
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the
CX-Programmer's PLC I/O Table Window, right-click and select Unit Setup
from the popup menu. Make the following settings in the CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area from the CPU Bus Unit Setup Window.
1. Initial Settings (Example)
Initial Server Settings
Tab
Item
Server specification type
Host name
Setting
SMTP
Host Name
smtp.omron.com
25 (default value)
Not selected
Port No.
Local mail address
Use POP before SMTP
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example Application
Section 2-9
Tab
Item
Item
Setting
DNS
IP Address
Port No.
10.56.3.24
53 (default value)
Retry timer
10 s (default value)
2. Destination Mail Address Setup
Tab
Setting
Mail Address
Mail address 1
3. Send Condition Setting 1
Tab
Item
Mail address
Setting
Send Mail
Address 1
Selected
Contents of E-mail Body
• Including User-set Data in E-mail Body
Tab
Item
Send user data
User defined mail address
Setting
Send Mail
Set the leading address of the
words in I/O memory that contain
the user-set ASCII data.
• Including Error Log Information in E-mail Body
Tab
Item
Setting
Setting
Send Mail
Send Error Log information
Selected
• Including Status Information in E-mail Body
Tab
Item
Send Mail
Send status information
Selected
Attached File Information
Example:
Sending the 10 words of data from W300 to W309 as an attached file called
W300.CSV.
Tab
Item
Setting
Send Mail
Send file data or I/O memory Send file data or I/O memory data
data
selected; I/O data (CSV) selected
W300
Attached file name
I/O memory data
Area: W; Address: 0; Size: 10
Mail Trigger Condition
Settings
• Send on the Rising Edge of the Dedicated Control Bit (Mail Send Switch)
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Setting
Bit value change
Send Mail
Note
The Mail Send Switch is bit 03 of word n in the CIO Area words allocated to
the Ethernet Unit as a CPU Bus Unit. (n = 1500 + 25 × unit number)
• Send when a Specified Word's Value meets a Preset Condition
Example: Send e-mail when the content of D00300 is 500.
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Setting
Send Mail
Word value change
Area: D
Address: 300
Value: 500
State: =
• Send on the Rising or Falling Edge of a Specified Bit
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example Application
Section 2-9
Example: Send e-mail when W300 bit 00 goes from OFF to ON.
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Setting
Send Mail
Word value change
Area: W
Address: 300
Bit: 00
State: Rising
• Send when an Event is Recorded in the Ethernet Unit's Error Log
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Setting
Send Mail
ETN condition (at error storage)
• Send when there is a Change in the CPU Unit's Status
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Setting
CPU condition
Send Mail
(Conditions are occurrence of a
non-fatal error, occurrence of a
fatal error, or change of the operat-
ing mode.)
• Send E-mails periodically at Fixed Intervals
Example: Send an e-mail every 10 minutes.
Tab
Item
Mail trigger type
Interval time
Setting
Send Mail
Periodic timer
10 min
2-9-3 Step 3. Transfer the CPU Bus Unit Setup Settings
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button. The
settings will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit.
2-9-4 Step 4. Automatic Transmission when Send Condition is Satisfied
When the send condition is satisfied, the e-mail is sent to the destination mail
address automatically.
When necessary, check the status of the Mail Send Function by checking the
Send Mail Status words (m and m+17 of the DM Area words allocated to the
Ethernet Unit as a CPU Bus Unit) from the ladder program. The send condi-
tion's 3 status bits will be 001 when mail is being sent and 010 when the trans-
mission has been completed normally.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3
Receive Mail Function
This section describes how to use the Ethernet Unit’s Mail Receive Function, including specifications, status details, I/O
3-1 Mail Receive Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Table of Remote Mail Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Mail Receive Function Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Function Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Using the Mail Receive Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Settings Required for the Mail Receive Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 Receive Mail Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Remote Mail Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Response List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Mail Receive Function Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Accessing Memory/Receiving Mail Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 I/O Memory Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Attached File Transfer Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Mail Receive Function Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 Identifying and Correcting Mail Receive Function Errors . . . . . . . .
3-8-2 Troubleshooting Mail Receive Errors with LED Indicators. . . . . . .
3-8-3 Error Log Codes Related to the Mail Receive Function. . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Example Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-1 Step 1. Create the I/O Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-2 Step 2. Make the Unit Setup Settings from the CX-Programmer. . .
3-9-3 Step 3. Transfer the CPU Bus Unit Setup Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-4 Step 4. Send Remote Mail Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
35
36
36
38
38
39
40
42
42
59
60
60
60
62
63
63
63
64
65
65
65
66
66
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Overview
Section 3-1
3-1 Mail Receive Function Overview
3-1-1 Introduction
The mail receive function performs the following functions using e-mails sent
to the Ethernet Unit.
1,2,3...
1. The user can enter a command in the e-mail and send that e-mail to the
Ethernet Unit.
2. A command written in the e-mail subject can be executed when the e-mail
is received. (The Ethernet Unit periodically checks the mail server to de-
termine whether mail has been delivered.)
3. The Ethernet Unit is equipped with a function that sends a reply e-mail in-
dicating the results of the command execution.
User
POP3 server
Sends mail.
E-mail
Internet or
intranet
Router
E-mail
Receives e-mail periodically.
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
Reply e-mail
Attached file:
DATA0.CSV
Command
execution
Command entered.
Example:
IOM Read
D_0
5
DATA0.CSV
The following protection settings can be used with e-mail reception.
• Receive e-mail from specified addresses only.
• Restrict remote e-mail commands.
• Receive e-mails with specified filename extensions only.
If an e-mail does not conform to the protection settings, the e-mail command
will be discarded without being processed.
Advantages
Description
The mail receive function can be used to perform a variety of operations in the
CPU Unit (such as reading/writing I/O memory, changing the operating mode,
and executing file memory operations) through the internet or intranet without
acquiring a fixed global address for the Ethernet Unit.
Configuration of the Mail
Receive Function
The user sends specific remote mail commands to the Ethernet Unit's e-mail
address specified in the Unit Setup.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Overview
Section 3-1
■ Remote Mail Commands
Enter the remote command (for example, FileRead) in ASCII in the e-mail
subject line.
■ Command Parameters
Enter the parameters (for example, Para1:Overwrite=OK) in ASCII in the e-
mail body.
■ Attached File Data
With remote write commands, a single file can be attached containing the
write data.
When writing data (up to 6,000 words) in a specified part of I/O memory, the I/
O memory data is attached as a data file (.IOM, .TXT, or .CSV).
When writing a data file (up to 1 MB) in file memory, any type of file can be
attached.
Timing of Mail Reception
Mail sent to the local address will be received at the following times (interval
time) and the corresponding command will be executed.
■ Reception Timing
Mail is checked at the check-mail interval (Server access interval time) set in
the POP Tab. The Server access interval time is set in minutes and the default
setting is 5 minutes.
Response to the Remote
Mail Command
A response e-mail is automatically sent to the e-mail address from which the
remote mail command was sent. The response e-mail contains the results of
the remote mail command execution.
■ Remote Mail Commands
The remote command response (for example, Re: FileRead) is entered in
ASCII in the e-mail subject line.
■ Command Execution Results
The response code (for example, Response Code:0000) is entered in ASCII
in the e-mail body.
Any parameters entered in the command e-mail will remain in the body of the
response e-mail (for example, >Para1:Overwrite=OK).
■ Attached File Data
With read commands from the PLC a single file can be attached in response.
When reading data (up to 6,000 words) in a specified part of I/O memory, the
I/O memory data is attached as a data file (.IOM, .TXT, or .CSV).
When reading a data file (up to 1 MB) in file memory, any type of file can be
attached.
3-1-2 Table of Remote Mail Commands
The following table lists the remote mail commands that can be sent.
Remote mail command type
Contents
Remote mail command
Accessing the CPU Unit's I/O memory area
A file can be attached to read/ • IOMWrite (I/O Memory Write)
write data in a specified data
area.
• IOMRead (I/O Memory Read)
Changing the CPU Unit's operating mode
The CPU Unit's operating
mode can be changed.
• ChangeMode (Operating
Mode Change)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Specifications
Section 3-2
Remote mail command type
Contents
Remote mail command
File memory opera-
tions
Performing file operations on a A file can be attached to read/ • FileWrite (File Write)
Memory Card in the CPU Unit write data in any file in EM file
• FileRead (File Read)
• FileDelete (File Delete)
• FileList (File List Read)
or EM file memory
memory or a Memory Card
mounted in the CPU Unit. It is
also possible to delete files and
list files.
Backing up data in user mem- The CPU Unit's user program
ory (user program or parameter or parameter area data can be
• UMBackup
(User Memory Backup)
area)
backed up to a file in EM file
memory or a Memory Card
mounted in the CPU Unit.
• PARAMBackup
(Parameter Area Backup)
Reading/Clearing the error log
The error log in the CPU Unit, a • ErrorLogRead (Error Log
CPU Bus Unit, or a Special I/O
Unit can be read or cleared.
Read)
• ErrorLogClear (Error Log
Clear)
Reading/Clearing the e-mail log
The Ethernet Unit received e-
mail log can be read or cleared.
• MailLogRead (Mail Log Read)
• MailLogClear (Mail Log Clear)
Performing an e-mail send/receive test
An e-mail send/receive test can • Test (Mail Test)
be performed with the Ethernet
Unit.
Sending a FINS command
Any FINS command frame can • FinsSend (FINS Command
be entered in the e-mail and
sent through the Ethernet Unit
to a specified unit address.
Send)
3-2 Mail Receive Function Specifications
3-2-1 Function Specifications
Received E-mail
Item
Protocol used
Specification
POP3 (Port number: 110/TCP; can be changed in the CPU Bus Unit Setup.)
The user can enter one of the following remote mail commands in the subject line.
Subject
Command type
Remote mail command
Accessing the CPU Unit's I/O memory area
• IOMWrite (I/O Memory Write)
• IOMRead (I/O Memory Read)
Changing the CPU Unit's operating mode
• ChangeMode (Operating Mode Change)
File memory opera-
tions
Performing file opera- • FileWrite (File Write)
tions on a Memory
Card in the CPU Unit
or EM file memory
• FileRead (File Read)
• FileDelete (File Delete)
• FileList (File List Read)
Backing up data in
user memory (user
program or parameter
area)
• UMBackup (User Memory Backup)
• PARAMBackup (Parameter Area Backup)
Reading/Clearing the error log
• ErrorLogRead (Error Log Read)
• ErrorLogClear (Error Log Clear)
Reading/Clearing the e-mail log
• MailLogRead (Mail Log Read)
• MailLogClear (Mail Log Clear)
Performing an e-mail send/receive test
Sending a FINS command
• Test (Mail Test)
• FinsSend (FINS Command Send)
E-mail body
The user can enter parameters for the commands listed above.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Specifications
Section 3-2
Item
Specification
Attached Data format
file
• IOM Write command:
Writes an I/O memory data file (IOM, TXT, or CSV) to the CPU Unit.
• File Write command:
Any type of file (a file with any filename extension) can be written to EM file memory or a
Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Data size
Format
• IOM Write command: 6,000 words max. (same limit for all file types)
• File Write command: 1 MB max.
MIME (version 1.0) format
Only one file
Number of
attachments
If more than one file is received, only the first file will be received and the remaining files will be
discarded.
Reception
(decoding)
Subject: Us ASCII
Body: Us ASCII
Attached file: Base64, quoted printable, 7 bit
Note Only one attached file is allowed. The filename must be ASCII and up to 8 + 3 charac-
ters long.
Encryption
None
Compression
Command line
None
Body: Data can be entered. (Lines other than the parameter line are comment lines.)
Attached file: Cannot be entered.
Protection
Protections when reading mail:
Authentication by password.
Protections when receiving remote mail commands:
The following protections can be used.
1. Receive from specified mail address only.
2. Receive attached files with the specified filename extensions only.
3. Restrict the remote mail commands that will be accepted.
Response E-mail
Item
Specification
Protocol used
SMTP (Port number: 25/TCP; can be changed in the CPU Bus Unit Setup using the CX-
Programmer.)
(The Use POP before SMTP Option can be selected to authenticate account and pass-
word information with the "POP before SMTP" method.)
Subject
The remote mail command is automatically entered after "Re:".
Example: Re: FileRead
E-mail body
Contains the response code and response status (fixed text associated with the response
code).
Attached Data format
file
• IOM Read command:
Reads data from the CPU Unit and creates an I/O memory data file (IOM, TXT, or CSV).
• File Read command:
Any type of file (a file with any filename extension) can be read from EM file memory or a
Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Data size
Format
• IOM Read command: 6,000 words max. (same limit for all file types)
• File Read command: 1 MB max.
MIME (version 1.0) format
Number of attach- Only one file
ments
Response
(encoding)
Subject: Us ASCII
Body: Us ASCII
Attached file: Base64
None
Encryption
Compression
None
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Receive Function
Section 3-3
3-3 Using the Mail Receive Function
3-3-1 Procedure
1.
Mount the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack, connect online with the
CX-Programmer or Programming Console, and create the I/O table.
↓
2.
With the CX-Programmer still connected online, make the following settings in the Unit
Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup):
• SMTP Tab (required)
• POP Tab (required)
• DNS Tab (when using a host name)
• Receive Mail Tab (when using protection settings to specify the source e-mail address,
allowed commands, and allowed attached files)
↓
3.
4.
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button to transfer the
Unit Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup) to the CPU Unit. (The settings data will be
transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area.)
↓
Create e-mail containing the remote mail command to send to the Ethernet Unit.
1. For the destination address, enter the Ethernet's local mail address set in the CPU Bus
Unit System Setup.
2. Enter the command name as the e-mail subject.
3. Enter the parameters in the e-mail body.
4. If the command uses an attached file, attach the file.
Note To preserve the simultaneity of the data when a data file is being sent as an
attachment, add a condition to write processes in the ladder program so that the
region of memory being converted to a data file is not overwritten from the ladder
program while memory is being accessed (mail is being received). Bit 02 of word
n+17 in the allocated CIO Area words will be ON while the memory is being
accessed.
↓
Send the created e-mail to the Ethernet Unit.
↓
5.
6.
A response e-mail will be returned automatically.
Note
The Ethernet Unit will be restarted when the settings data is transferred to the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area, so that the new settings are read and
become effective. Verify that it is safe for the Ethernet Unit to restart before
transferring the settings data.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Receive Function
Section 3-3
3-3-2 Settings Required for the Mail Receive Function
The following Unit settings must be made when using the Mail Receive Func-
tion.
CX-Programmer
Unit Setup Tab
Setting
Setting requirement
SMTP
Server specification type Required.
1-4 Common Proto-
col Settings
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
One or the other is required, depending on the
Server specification type setting.
Rarely required (when a setting other than the
default setting of 25 is required).
Local mail address
Required.
Use POP before SMTP Required when the account must be authenti-
cated with POP3 before sending mail.
POP
Server specification type Required.
IP Address
Host name
Port No.
One or the other is required, depending on the
server specification method setting.
Rarely required (when a setting other than the
default setting of 110 is required).
Account Name
Required when the account name is different
from the name up to the @ symbol in the e-mail
address. (9 characters max.)
Mail password
Required. (8 characters max.)
Server access interval
time
Optional (Change when the default setting of 5
minutes is unacceptable.)
DNS
IP Address
Port No.
Required.
(See note.)
Rarely required (when a setting other than the
default setting of 53 is required).
Retry timer
Optional (Change when the default setting of 10
seconds is unacceptable.)
Receive Mail
Mail address
Select the Protect using mail address Option
when you do not want to receive mail from
addresses other than the specified address.
page 40
Receive file with speci- Select this option when you do not want to
fied extension only
receive attached files other than the specified
types.
Receive specified com- Select this option when you want to specify the
mands only
remote mail commands that can be received.
Note
Make DNS settings when the Server specification type is set to Host name in
the SMTP or POP Tab.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Receive Function
Section 3-3
3-3-3 Receive Mail Tab
The CPU Bus Unit settings for the mail receive function can be set in the CX-
Programmer's CPU Bus Unit Setup Window.
Posting Mail Address
Protection Setting
Item
Contents
Default
Protect using mail
address
Select this option when you do not want to
receive mail from addresses other than the
specified address(es).
Not selected
Set the allowed source e-mail address in the
Mail address field.
Mail address
Set a source e-mail address here when block- None
ing e-mails from sources other than this
address. E-mails will not be accepted from e-
mail addresses other than the one(s) entered
here.
The mail address entry can be up to 50 charac-
ters long. More than one e-mail address can be
entered by separating the addresses with com-
mas.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Mail Receive Function
Section 3-3
Receive Attached File
Setting
Item
Contents
Default
Receive file with
specified extension
only
Select this option when you do not want to
receive attached files other than the specified
file types (filename extensions). Multiple exten-
sions can be selected.
Selected
OBJ
Select this option to accept files with the ".OBJ" Selected
extension. OBJ files contain all of the cyclic
task and interrupt task programs in the CPU
Unit and can be created using the CX-Pro-
grammer.
STD
Select this option to accept files with the ".STD"
extension. STD files contain the PLC Setup,
registered I/O tables, routing tables, Unit Set-
ups, etc., and can be read from the CPU Unit
using the CX-Programmer.
IOM
CSV
Select this option to accept files with the ".IOM"
extension. IOM files contain bit data from the
beginning to the end of a CPU Unit data area
and can be created using the CX-Programmer.
Select this option to accept files with the ".CSV"
extension. CSV files be created with applica-
tions such as MS Excel.
TXT
Select this option to accept text files with the
".TXT" extension.
Custom 1 to 3
Select these options to accept files with the
user-specified filename extension.
Not
selected
Receive Command Setting
Item
Contents
Default
Receive specified com-
mands only
Select this option when you want only
the specified commands to be exe-
cuted.
Selected
FileWrite
Select when you want to execute the
File Write command.
Not selected
Selected
FileRead
Select when you want to execute the
File Read command.
FileDelete
Select when you want to execute the
File Delete command.
Not selected
Selected
FileList
Select when you want to execute the
File List Read command.
UMBackup
PARAMBackup
IOMWrite
Select when you want to execute the
User Memory Backup command.
Selected
Select when you want to execute the
Parameter Area Backup command.
Selected
Select when you want to execute the
I/O Memory Write command.
Not selected
Selected
IOMRead
Select when you want to execute the
I/O Memory Read command.
ChangeMode
ErrorLogRead
ErrorLogClear
MailLogRead
Select when you want to execute the
Operating Mode Change command.
Not selected
Selected
Select when you want to execute the
Error Log Read command.
Select when you want to execute the
Error Log Clear command.
Selected
Select when you want to execute the
Mail Log Read command.
Selected
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
Item
MailLogClear
Contents
Default
Select when you want to execute the
Mail Log Clear command.
Selected
Test
Select when you want to execute the
Mail Test command.
Selected
FinsSend
Select when you want to execute the
FINS Command Send command.
Not selected
3-4 Remote Mail Command Details
3-4-1 Format
Command Format
To:
FileWrite
Enter the Ethernet Unit's local mail address.
CC:
Subject:
Enter the command name.
Enter the command's parameters, as follows.
Para1:MEMCARD ¥user
Para2:Overwrite=OK
#Overwrite OK
Body:
Note: Enter standard US-ASCII characters only.
· Identify the parameter number at the beginning as ParaXX.
· Enter each parameter on a separate line.
· Enter any comments after the "#" character.
Write.iom(98KB)
Attached file:
Attach a file when required.
Response Format
To:
Re:FileWrite
Returns response to the originating e-mail address.
The command name will be returned after "Re:".
CC:
Subject:
Response Code:0000
Response Status: Normal end
Response information will be returned in the following order:
· The response code will be returned after "Response Code:".
· The response status will be returned after "Response Status:".
· The original e-mail's parameters are returned after ">" characters.
· The original e-mail's attached file will be deleted.
Body:
>Para1:MEMCARD ¥user
>Para2:Overwrite=OK
>#Overwrite OK
>-----(Attached File was deleted)----
Read.iom(98KB)
Attached file:
A file will be attached if the response requires an attached file.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
FileWrite (File Write)
Function
Writes the attached file to the CPU Unit's EM file memory or a Memory Card
mounted in the CPU Unit.
Command Format
Subject: FileWrite
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Destination folder
Specifies the destination folder.
Can be omitted.
name
• MEMCARDspecifies the Memory
Example)
Card's root directory.
• EMspecifies the EM file memory's
root directory.
Specifying subdirectory OMRON in
the Memory Card:
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default write destination is
the Memory Card's root direc-
tory.
Para2:Overwrite=OK or NG
Specifies whether or not an existing Can be omitted.
file may be overwritten.
Example)
• To allow an existing file with the
same filename to be overwritten,
enter "Overwrite=OK."
• To prevent an existing file with the
same filename from being overwrit-
ten, enter "Overwrite=NG."
Allowing existing file to be overwrit-
ten:
Para2:Overwrite=OK
Note If this parameter is omitted,
overwriting is prohibited.
Attached file: Any file
Any file (up to 1 MB) can be
attached.
Cannot be omitted.
Note The file can be up to 1 MB in
size.
Note If the Receive file with speci-
fied extension only Option is
selected in the Receive Mail
Tab, only files with the speci-
fied filename extensions can
be written.
Response Format
Subject: Re: FileWrite
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
> Para1:Destination folder name
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
> Para2:Overwrite=OK or NG
Attached file: None
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
FileRead (File Read)
Function
Reads any file from the CPU Unit's EM file memory or a Memory Card
mounted in the CPU Unit and returns the file as an attachment.
Command Format
Subject: FileRead
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Source folder name
Specifies the source folder.
Can be omitted.
• MEMCARDspecifies the Memory
Card's root directory.
• EMspecifies the EM file memory's
root directory.
Example)
Specifying subdirectory OMRON in
the Memory Card:
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default read source is the
Memory Card's root directory.
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Para2:File name
Specifies the name of the file
(including the filename extension) to
be read.
Cannot be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Specifying AUTOEXEC.STD:
Para2:AUTOEXEC.STD
parameter error will occur.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:FileRead
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Source folder name
> Para2:File name
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Attached file: Yes
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
FileDelete (File Delete)
Function
Deletes the specified file from the CPU Unit's EM file memory or a Memory
Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Command Format
Subject: FileDelete
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Folder name
Specifies the folder containing the
file to be deleted.
Can be omitted.
• MEMCARDspecifies the Memory
Card's root directory.
• EMspecifies the EM file memory's
root directory.
Example)
Specifying subdirectory OMRON in
the Memory Card:
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default directory is the
Memory Card's root directory.
Para2:File name
Specifies the name of the file
(including the filename extension) to
be deleted.
Cannot be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Specifying AUTOEXEC.STD:
Para2:AUTOEXEC.STD
parameter error will occur.
Note If the Receive file with speci-
fied extension only Option is
selected in the Receive Mail
Tab, only files with the speci-
fied filename extensions can
be deleted.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:FileDelete
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Folder name
> Para2:File name
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Attached file: None
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
FileList (File List Read)
Function
Returns a list of the files contained in the specified folder in the CPU Unit's
EM file memory or a Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Command Format
Subject: FileList
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Source folder name
Specifies the source folder contain- Can be omitted.
ing the files that will be listed.
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default source directory is
the Memory Card's root direc-
tory.
Example)
Specifying subdirectory OMRON in
the Memory Card:
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Attached file: None
Response Format Details
Subject: Re:FileList
Response contents
Description
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
File list
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
--------------------------------------------------------
Directory Path: \omron
• Directory Path:
[A = Archive file , D = sub -Directory ]
Name of folder containing listed files
• (FILENAME)
[V = Volume label , S = System file
]
[H = Hidden file , R = Read -only file]
(FILENAME)
(DATE)
(FILESIZE) (ATTRI B)
File name
• (DATE)
Date that file was last updated
• (FILESIZE)
.
2003/06/12 17:15:17
2003/06/12 17:15:17
0
0
_D____
_D____
A_____
A_____
..
AUTOEXEC.OBJ 2003/06/12 17:19:07
AUTOEXEC.STD 2003/06/12 17:19:10
2672
16048
---- End of File List ----------------------------------
File size in bytes
• (ATTRIB)
File attributes
A:Archive file
D:Directory (folder)
V:Volume label
S:System file
H:Hidden file
R:Read-only file
> Para1:Source folder name
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Attached file: None
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
UMBackup (User Memory Backup)
Function
Backs up (saves) the CPU Unit's user program in the CPU Unit's EM file
memory or a Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Command Format Details
Subject: UMBackup
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Destination folder
Specifies the destination folder in
which the user program will be
saved.
Can be omitted.
name
• MEMCARDspecifies the Memory
Card's root directory.
• EMspecifies the EM file memory's
root directory.
Example)
Specifying subdirectory OMRONin
the Memory Card:
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default destination is the
Memory Card's root directory.
Para2:File name
Specifies the name of the file in
which the user program data will be
saved.
Can be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default file name is
AUTOEXEC.OBJ.
Specifying USER.OBJ:
Para2:USER.OBJ
Para3:Overwrite=OK or NG
Specifies whether or not an existing Can be omitted.
file may be overwritten.
• To allow an existing file with the
same filename to be overwritten,
enter "Overwrite=OK".
• To prevent an existing file with the
same filename from being overwrit-
ten, enter "Overwrite=NG".
Example)
Allowing existing file to be overwrit-
ten:
Para3:Overwrite=OK
Note If this parameter is omitted,
overwriting is prohibited.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:UMBackup
Response contents
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Destination folder name
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
> Para2:File name
> Para3:Overwrite=OK or NG
Attached file: None
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
PARAMBackup (Parameter Area Backup)
Function
Backs up (saves) the parameter area data in the CPU Unit's EM file memory
or a Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit.
Command Format
Subject: PARAMBackup
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Destination folder
Specifies the destination folder in
which the user program will be
saved
Can be omitted.
name
• MEMCARDspecifies the Memory
Card's root directory.
• EMspecifies the EM file memory's
root directory.
Example)
Specifying subdirectory OMRONin
the Memory Card:
Para1:MEMCARD\OMRON
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default destination is the
Memory Card's root directory.
Para2:File name
Specifies the name of the file in
which the parameter area data will
be saved.
Can be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted,
the default file name is
AUTOEXEC.STD.
Specifying USER.STD:
Para2:USER.STD
Para3:Overwrite=OK or NG
Specifies whether or not an existing Can be omitted.
file may be overwritten.
• To allow an existing file with the
same filename to be overwritten,
enter "Overwrite=OK".
• To prevent an existing file with the
same filename from being overwrit-
ten, enter "Overwrite=NG".
Example)
Allowing existing file to be overwrit-
ten:
Para3:Overwrite=OK
Note If this parameter is omitted,
overwriting is prohibited.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:PARAMBackup
Response contents
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Destination folder name
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Included only if this parameter was specified.
> Para2:File name
> Para3:Overwrite=OK or NG
Attached file: None
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
IOMWrite (I/O Memory Write)
Function
Writes the contents of the attached file to the specified data area in the CPU
Unit's I/O memory. The data is written in word units.
Command Format
Subject: IOMWrite
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:File format
The file format is specified with two digits, as follows: Cannot be omit-
Para1: AB
ted.
Example)
AData format
Specifying a file of comma-delimited
word data with returns every 16 fields:
Para1:3D
0: Binary (.IOM)
1:Non-delimited words (.TXT)
2:Non-delimited double words (.TXT)
3:Comma-delimited words (.CSV)
4:Comma-delimited double words (.CSV)
5:Tab-delimited words (.TXT)
6:Tab-delimited double words (.TXT)
BCarriage returns
0:No returns
8:Return every 10 fields
9:Return every 1 field
A:Return every 2 fields
B:Return every 4 fields
C:Return every 5 fields
D:Return every 16 fields
Note If this parameter is omitted, a parameter error
will occur.
Para2:Starting write address
Specify the data area and address as follows:
• CIO Area: CH_0to CH_6143
Cannot be omit-
ted.
• Work Area: W_0to W_511
• Holding Area: H_0to H_511
• Auxiliary Area: A_0to A_447
• Timer Area: T_0to T_4095
Example)
Specifying D00100 as the starting
address:
Para2:D_100
• Counter Area: C_0to C_4095
• DM Area: D_0to D_32767
• EM Area (current EM bank): E_0to E_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 0): E0_0to E0_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 1): E1_0to E1_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 2): E2_0to E2_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 3): E3_0to E3_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 4): E4_0to E4_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 5): E5_0to E5_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 6): E6_0to E6_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 7): E7_0to E7_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 8): E8_0to E8_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 9): E9_0to E9_32767
• EM Area (EM bank A): EA_0to EA_32767
• EM Area (EM bank B): EB_0to EB_32767
• EM Area (EM bank C): EC_0to EC_32767
Note If this parameter is omitted, a parameter error
will occur.
Para3:Overwrite=OKor NG
Specifies whether or not an existing file may be over- Can be omitted.
written.
• To allow an existing file with the same filename to be
Example)
Allowing existing file to be overwritten:
Para3:Overwrite=OK
overwritten, enter "Overwrite=OK".
• To prevent an existing file with the same filename
from being overwritten, enter "Overwrite=NG".
Note If this parameter is omitted, overwriting is pro-
hibited.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
Attached file: Yes
Attach an I/O data file (IOM, CSV, or TXT format).
Cannot be omit-
ted.
Note Up to 6,000 words can be written from the
data file. Attach a file with 6,000 or fewer
words of data.
Note Only a file with the IOM, CSV, or TXT can be
written to I/O memory. Files with any other file-
name extension cannot be written to I/O mem-
ory regardless of the allowed file settings set in
the Receive Mail Tab.
Response Format
Subject: Re:IOMWrite
Response contents
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:File format
> Para2:Starting write address
> Para3:Overwrite=OK or NG
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Attached file: None
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
IOMRead (I/O Memory Read)
Function
Reads the contents of the specified range of words from the CPU Unit's I/O
memory and returns the data in an attached file. The data is read in word
units.
Command Format
Subject: IOMRead
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:File format
The file format is specified with two digits, as fol-
lows:
Cannot be omit-
ted.
Para1: AB
AData format
0:Binary (.IOM)
Example)
Specifying a file of comma-delimited
word data with returns every 16 fields:
Para1:3D
1:Non-delimited words (.TXT)
2:Non-delimited double words (.TXT)
3:Comma-delimited words (.CSV)
4:Comma-delimited double words (.CSV)
5:Tab-delimited words (.TXT)
6:Tab-delimited double words (.TXT)
BCarriage returns
0:No returns
8:Return every 10 fields
9:Return every 1 field
A:Return every 2 fields
B:Return every 4 fields
C:Return every 5 fields
D:Return every 16 fields
Note If this parameter is omitted, a parameter
error will occur.
Para2:Starting read address
Specify the data area and address as follows:
• CIO Area: CH_0to CH_6143
Cannot be omit-
ted.
• Work Area: W_0to W_511
• Holding Area: H_0to H_511
• Auxiliary Area: A_0to A_447
• Timer Area: T_0to T_4095
Example)
Specifying D00100 as the starting
address:
Para2:D_100
• Counter Area: C_0to C_4095
• DM Area: D_0to D_32767
• EM Area (current EM bank): E_0to E_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 0): E0_0to E0_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 1): E1_0to E1_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 2): E2_0to E2_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 3): E3_0to E3_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 4): E4_0to E4_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 5): E5_0to E5_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 6): E6_0to E6_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 7): E7_0to E7_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 8): E8_0to E8_32767
• EM Area (EM bank 9): E9_0to E9_32767
• EM Area (EM bank A): EA_0to EA_32767
• EM Area (EM bank B): EB_0to EB_32767
• EM Area (EM bank C): EC_0to EC_32767
Note If this parameter is omitted, a parameter
error will occur.
Para3:Number of words
Specifies the number of words (1 to 6,000) to read. Cannot be omit-
ted.
Note Up to 6,000 words can be read to the
attached file. Specify 6,000 or fewer words
for the number of words to read.
Example)
Specifying 50 words:
Para3:50
Note If this parameter is omitted, a parameter
error will occur.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
Para4:File name
Specifies the name of the file (including the file-
name extension) in which the read data will be
stored.
Note Only filename extensions IOM, CSV, and
TXT can be used. Other filename exten-
sions cannot be specified.
Can be omitted.
Example)
Specifying MEMORY.TXT:
Para4:MEMORY.TXT
Note If this parameter is omitted, the file will be
saved as BACKUP.IOM, BACKUP.TXT, or
BACKUP.CSV.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:IOMRead
Response contents
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:File format
> Para2:Starting read address
> Para3:Number of words
> Para4:File name
Included only if this parameter was specified.
Attached file: Yes
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
ChangeMode (Operating Mode Change)
Function
Changes the CPU Unit's operating mode.
Command Format
Subject: ChangeMode
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:RUN (or MON or PRG)
Changes the CPU Unit's operating Cannot be omitted.
mode.
• To change to RUNmode, enter
RUN.
• To change to MONITOR mode,
enter MON.
Example)
Changing to RUN mode:
Para1:RUN
• To change to PROGRAM mode,
enter PRG.
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
parameter error will occur.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:ChangeMode
Response contents
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:RUN (or MON or PRG)
Attached file: None
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
ErrorLogRead (Error Log Read)
Function
Reads the entire error log from the CPU Unit or a specified Special Unit (CPU
Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit).
Command Format
Subject: ErrorLogRead
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Unit address
Specifies the unit address of the
Unit from which the error log will be
read.
Cannot be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Specifying a CPU Bus Unit (unit
number 0):
parameter error will occur.
Para1:10
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:ErrorLogRead
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Unit address
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Attached file: None
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
ErrorLogClear (Error Log Clear)
Function
Clears the entire error log from the CPU Unit or a specified Special Unit (CPU
Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit).
Command Format
Subject: ErrorLogClear
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:Unit address
Specifies the unit address of the
Unit from which the error log will be
cleared.
Cannot be omitted.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Specifying a CPU Bus Unit (unit
number 0):
parameter error will occur.
Para1:10
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:ErrorLogClear
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
> Para1:Unit address
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Attached file: None
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
MailLogRead (Mail Log Read)
Function
Reads the mail log, which contains information on mail received by the Ether-
net Unit. (The mail log contains basic information on all of the mail received
since power was turned ON or the mail log was cleared.)
Command Format
Subject: MailLogRead
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: None
---
---
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:MailLogRead
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Response Status:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
-- (Mail Log List) --
The mail log list read from the Ethernet Unit is
returned in the body of the response e-mail. The
mail log entries contain the following information:
• Source e-mail address
• Received command
• Date/time of reception
Attached file: None
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
MailLogClear (Mail Log Clear)
Function
Clears the mail log, which contains information on mail received by the Ether-
net Unit.
Command Format
Subject: MailLogClear
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: None
---
---
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:MailLogClear
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Response Status:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Attached file: None
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
Test (Mail Test)
Function
Performs an e-mail send/receive test with the Ethernet Unit.
When this remote mail command is executed, the Ethernet Unit returns a
response to the address that sent the remote mail command.
Command Format
Subject: Test
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: None
---
---
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:Test
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Attached file: None
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Mail Command Details
Section 3-4
FinsSend (FINS Command Send)
Function
Requests execution of the specified FINS command by the Ethernet Unit.
Command Format
Subject: FinsSend
Notation
Description
Omission
Body: Para1:FINS header
Enter the desired FINS header val- Cannot be omitted.
ues for DNA, DA1, and DA2.
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Example)
parameter error will occur.
Specifying DNA=01, DA1=02, and
DA2=00:
Para1:010200
Para2:Command code and
parameter
Enter the command code and
parameter.
Cannot be omitted.
*: Always specify this as a termina-
tor.
Example)
Note If this parameter is omitted, a
Specifying 0501:
Para2:0501*
parameter error will occur.
Attached file: None
Response Format
Subject: Re:FinsSend
Response contents
Body: Response Code:@@@@
Response Status:@@@@
-- (FINS header) --
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
Refer to 3-4-2 Response List.
The FINS response is entered in the e-mail body.
The FINS response is entered in the e-mail body.
-- (Response data) --
Attached file: None
3-4-2 Response List
Response
Code
Response Status
Normal completion
Description
0000
Command completed normally.
F101
E-mail size exceeds than the The e-mail is too large.
maximum size.
F102
F103
F104
E-mail address error
Invalid command
Specified e-mail address is invalid.
Specified command is invalid.
Protected (Command type)
Specified command is disabled in the
protection settings.
F105
F201
F301
F302
F303
Invalid subject
Specified subject is invalid.
Specified parameter is invalid.
Decoding error
Invalid parameter
Decoding error
Invalid attached file
Attached file does not exist
Attached file is invalid.
No attached file
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Status
Section 3-5
Response
Code
Response Status
Description
F304
Protected (File extension)
Attached file type (filename exten-
sion) is disabled in the protection set-
tings.
F305
F4FF
File size exceeds than the
maximum size.
Attached file is too large.
Other Error
Other error
3-5 Mail Receive Function Status
3-5-1 Accessing Memory/Receiving Mail Flag
The Accessing Memory/Receiving Mail Flag is located in CIO Area words
allocated to the Ethernet Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.
The leading address (n) of the allocated CIO area is determined by the Ether-
net Unit's unit number (n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number).
Accessing Memory/
Receiving Mail Flag (Bit 02
of n+17)
When the mail receive function receives a FileWrite, FileRead, FileDelete,
FileList, IOMWrite, or IOMRead command, the Ethernet Unit will access the
CPU Unit's I/O memory and automatically create a data file. The Accessing
Memory/Receiving Mail Flag (bit 02 of n+17) will be ON while the CPU Unit's
memory is being accessed.
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
n+17
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Accessing Memory/Receiving Mail Flag
To maintain the uniformity of the data in the data file, use this flag as a condi-
tion for write operations in the ladder program to prevent the ladder program
from overwriting the data while it is being converted to a data file.
3-6 I/O Memory Data Formats
IOM Format
When 5 words of hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) are
being copied to an attached file in IOM format, the data is stored in the
attached file as shown in the following diagram.
Example: Binary data format with a return every 10 fields
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
IOM file contents
XX XX
XX 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE F0 12 34
48 bytes (Reserved for system)
Note
The IOM file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to binary data for-
mat.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Memory Data Formats
Section 3-6
TXT Format
When hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) is being copied
to an attached file in TXT format, the data is converted to ASCII in one-word
fields or two-word fields. The fields (one-word or two-word) are delimited by
tabs ([HT]: 09) and a return and line feed ([CR][LF]: 0D0A) are inserted after
the specified number of fields.
Example: Tab-delimited words with a return every 10 fields
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
TXT file contents
31 32 33 34 09 35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09
1
2
3
4
[HT]
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 09
[CR] [LF] [HT]
5
6
7
8
[HT]
9
A
B
C
[HT]
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Contents of TXT file when displayed
1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@
9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0
The @ character represents a hard tab and is displayed as a tab in text displays.
Note
The TXT file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to tab-delimited
data.
CSV Format
When hexadecimal I/O memory data (1234, 5678, 9ABC, etc.) is being copied
to an attached file in CSV format, the data is converted to ASCII in one-word
fields or two-word fields. The fields (one-word or two-word) are delimited by
commas (",": 2C) and a return and line feed ([CR][LF]: 0D0A) are inserted
after the specified number of fields.
Example: Comma-delimited words with a return every 10 fields
I/O memory contents
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
CSV file contents
31 32 33 34 2C 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C
1
2
3
4
,
5
6
7
8
,
9
A
B
C
,
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 2C
[CR] [LF]
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
,
Contents of CSV file when displayed
1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,
9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0
Note
The CSV file format is compatible with the CPU Unit's READ DATA FILE and
WRITE DATA FILE instructions (FREAD and FWRIT) set to comma-delimited
data.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attached File Transfer Times
Section 3-7
3-7 Attached File Transfer Times
When sending an attached file with the Mail Receive Function, the access
time can be as long as 30 or 40 minutes for a very large file. The following
tables show how long the CPU Unit's memory will be accessed by the Ether-
net Unit (how long the Accessing Memory/Receiving Mail Flag will be ON).
Access Times for CS1 and
CJ1 CPU Units
Command
Data size
CPU Unit's operating mode
PROGRAM
---
RUN
10 ms cycle time
FileWrite
1 KB
0.3 s
1.5 s
1.6 s
10 KB
9.3 s
100 KB
1 MB
13.7 s
160.1 s
0.2 s
90.4 s
1125.4 s
0.9 s
FileRead
1 KB
10 KB
1.0 s
6.3 s
100 KB
1 MB
9.2 s
65.9 s
1132.0 s
0.1 s
135.2 s
0.1 s
IOMWrite
IOMRead
1 word
6,000 words
1 word
0.2 s
0.3 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
6,000 words
0.2 s
0.3 s
Access Times for CS1-H
and CJ1-H CPU Units
Command
Data size
CPU Unit's operating mode
PROGRAM
---
RUN
10 ms cycle time
FileWrite
1 KB
0.2 s
0.9 s
9.0 s
90.5 s
0.1 s
0.4 s
4.0 s
48.4 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.4 s
10 KB
2.6 s
100 KB
1 MB
25.7 s
302.8 s
0.3 s
FileRead
1 KB
10 KB
1.8 s
100 KB
1 MB
17.8 s
272.0 s
0.1 s
IOMWrite
IOMRead
1 word
6,000 words
1 word
6,000 words
0.2 s
0.1 s
0.2 s
Note
(1) The access times for FileWrite and FileRead commands indicate Memo-
ry Card access times.
(2) The access times in the tables above are standard times when the PLC
Setup's "Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time" setting is set to the default val-
ue of 4% of the cycle time.
(3) The attached file transfer time can be reduced by increasing the time al-
lowed for peripheral servicing in the PLC Setup's "Fixed Peripheral Ser-
vicing Time" setting.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Errors
Section 3-8
3-8 Mail Receive Function Errors
3-8-1 Identifying and Correcting Mail Receive Function Errors
The following table shows the primary causes of e-mail transmission errors
and corresponding solution.
Cause
Correction
• The POP, SMTP, or DNS server
address has not been set.
• Correctly set each server address (IP
address or host name).
• POP authentication error
• Correctly set the POP settings (account
and password).
• POP, SMTP, or DNS server communi- • Inspect the communications path (Ether-
cations timeout
net Unit, cable connections, hub, router,
and server) and correct any problems or
damage.
• Local mail address has not been set. • Correctly set the local mail address.
• The attached file's file name is not
entered in standard ASCII (8 charac-
ters max.).
• Correctly set the attached file's file name
and extension in ASCII characters.
• The attached file's filename extension
is not entered in standard ASCII (3
characters).
• Specified word or specified bit data
area/address error
• Correctly set the data area and address
for the specified word or bit.
3-8-2 Troubleshooting Mail Receive Errors with LED Indicators
RUN ERC ERH LNK HOST
Probable cause
Correction
Lit --- Lit --- Flash- • There is an error in • Read the Error Sta-
ing
the server (DNS,
SMTP, or POP3)
settings in the Unit
Setup.
tus Flags and error
log and correct the
setting that caused
the error. If the error
recurs, replace the
CPU Unit.
Not lit ---
Flash- • An authentication
ing error occurred in
• Correctly set the
POP settings
with the POP server. (account and pass-
A communications
problem occurred
with the server.
word).
• Inspect the commu-
nications path
• A network failure
(Ethernet Unit, cable
occurred in the com- connections, hub,
munications path
and caused an
access timeout.
router, and server)
and correct any
problems or dam-
age.
Note
For more details on the error log, refer to 8-3 Error Log in the Operation Man-
ual Construction of Networks.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mail Receive Function Errors
Section 3-8
3-8-3 Error Log Codes Related to the Mail Receive Function
If an error occurs while the Ethernet Unit is operating, the main error code,
detailed error code, and time stamp will be recorded in the error log.
The contents of the error log can be read by sending a FINS command to the
Ethernet Unit or sending the ErrorLogRead command through e-mail.
Error code
(Hex)
Meaning
Detailed error code
2nd byte
Correction
EEPROM
1st byte
021A
Logic error in 00
setting table
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
Data link table
Network parameters
Routing table
Correctly set the data
indicated by the 2nd
byte of the detailed
error code.
Saved
Unit Setup
CPU Bus Unit words
(CIO or DM)
03C1
03C4
Server set-
ting error
00: DNS
01:
02:
03:
04:
01:
02:
IP address
Correctly set the server Not saved
settings indicated by
the detailed error code.
01: SMTP
02: POP3
03: SNTP
00: DNS
Host name
Port number
Other parameter
Server con-
nection error
Specified host not found Take one of the follow- Not saved
ing steps:
01: SMTP
02: POP3
03: SNTP
No service from speci-
fied host
• Correctly set the indi-
cated server's set-
tings.
• Inspect the communi-
cations path (Ethernet
Unit, cable connec-
tions, hub, router, and
server) and correct
any problems or dam-
age.
03:
04:
Timeout
Connection closed unilat-
erally by host
05:
06:
Could not connect,
account information
invalid
Host name resolution
error
07:
08:
09:
Transmission error
Reception error
Other error
03C5
Mail mainte-
nance func-
tion error
0000 to EFFF: FINS error response
F101: Normal completion
F101: E-mail too large
• Determine the cause Not saved
of the error from the
detailed error code,
correct the problem,
and send the com-
F102: E-mail address error
F103: Invalid command
mand again.
F104: Protected (Command type)
F105: Invalid subject
F201: Invalid parameter
F301: Decoding error
F302: Invalid attached file
F303: Attached file does not exist
F304: Protected (File extension)
F305: Attached file too large
Note
For more details on the error log, refer to 8-3 Error Log in the Operation Man-
ual Construction of Networks (W420).
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example Application
Section 3-9
3-9 Example Application
3-9-1 Step 1. Create the I/O Table
Mount the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack, connect online
with the CX-Programmer or Programming Console, and create the I/O table.
3-9-2 Step 2. Make the Unit Setup Settings from the CX-Programmer
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the
CX-Programmer's PLC I/O Table Window, right-click and select Unit Setup
from the popup menu. Make the following settings in the CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area from the CPU Bus Unit Setup Window.
Local Mail Address (SMTP
Tab)
Item name
Example
Local mail address
Initial POP3 Server
Settings (POP Tab)
Item name
Example
Host Name
Server specification type
Host name
mail.omron.com
110
Port No.
Account Name
Mail password
omronID
omronPS
5 minutes
Server access interval
• DNS Server IP Address Setting (DNS Tab, When Required)
Item name Example
IP Address
10.6.57.11
Port No.
53
10
Retry timer
Initial Settings for the Mail
Receive Function
Item name
Example
Not selected
Posting Mail Address Protect using mail address
Protection Setting
Mail address
None
Receive Attached
File Setting
Receive file with specified
extension only
Not selected
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example Application
Section 3-9
Item name
Example
Receive Command
Setting
Receive specified commands Selected
only
FileWrite
Not selected
Selected
FileRead
FileDelete
FileList
Not selected
Selected
UMBackup
PARAMBackup
IOMWrite
Selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
IOMRead
ChangeMode
ErrorLogRead
ErrorLogClear
MailLogRead
MailLogClear
Test
Not selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
FinsSend
Not selected
3-9-3 Step 3. Transfer the CPU Bus Unit Setup Settings
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button. The
settings will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU Unit.
3-9-4 Step 4. Send Remote Mail Commands
Send e-mails containing remote mail commands to the Ethernet Unit.
Reading Data from a
CPU Unit Data Area
Example)
In this example, 10 words of data are read from words D00100 to D00109 and
converted to a file called D00100.CSV.
Subject: IOMRead
Body: Para1:38
Para2:D_100
Para3:10
Para4: D00100.CSV
Attached file: None
Backing Up the CPU
Unit's User Program
in the Memory Card
Example)
In this example, the CPU Unit's user program is backed up in a file called
USER.OBJ.
Subject: UMBackup
Body: Para2:USER.OBJ
Attached file: None
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4
FTP Server
4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 FTP Server Function Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Connecting to the FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Using the FTP Server Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-3 Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 FTP Server Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Using FTP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Using the Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-3 Error Messages and FTP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Checking FTP Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-1 FTP Status Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Using File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-1 File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-2 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-3 Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-4 I/O Memory Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 FTP File Transfer Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 UNIX Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
73
73
73
78
79
79
80
80
80
82
82
85
86
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 4-1
4-1 Overview
The Ethernet Unit has a built-in FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server function,
so other computers on the Ethernet can read or write (upload/download) large
files in the EM file memory by executing FTP commands from the FTP client
software.
FTP client
Intranet
Specify the file and upload or download
using FTP commands such as get and put.
Ethernet
Download
Upload
Ethernet Unit
Large file
Files in the EM File Memory or the
Memory Card mounted to the CPU
Unit.
Note Only one FTP client can connect at the same time.
4-1-1 Specifications
Item
Specification
Executable com-
mands
open:
user:
ls:
Connects the specified host FTP server.
Specifies user name for the remote FTP server.
Displays the Memory Card file names.
dir:
Display the Memory Card file names and details.
rename: Changes a file name.
mkdir: Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host.
rmdir: Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host.
cd:
Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory.
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory.
Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory.
cdup:
pwd:
type:
get:
Specifies the data type of transferred files.
Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card.
Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card.
mget:
put:
mput:
delete: Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card.
mdelete: Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card.
close: Disconnects the FTP server.
bye:
Closes the FTP (client).
Closes the FTP (client).
quit:
Protection
Protocol
FTP login name consists of 12 letters max. CONFIDENTIAL is the default login name.
Password consists of 8 characters max.
FTP (port number: 21/TCP)
1
Number of connec-
tions
Note The PLC, however, is unable to read or write files at other nodes using FTP
because the Ethernet Unit does not support FTP client functions.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Server Function Details
Section 4-2
4-2 FTP Server Function Details
4-2-1 File Types
The file system in the CPU Unit that can be accessed by the Ethernet Unit
includes files in any Memory Card mounted in the CPU Unit and files in the
EM file memory. The directory tree is shown below.
/:
root
MEMCARD:
EM:
Memory card directory
EM file memory directory
A connection will be initially made to the root directory.
Note
1. The date of the MEMCARD directory displayed for ls or dir commands in
the root directory will be the date of the file system volume label.
2. The login date will be displayed for EM files and for MEMCARD if a volume
label has not been created.
4-2-2 Connecting to the FTP Server
The host computer must connect to the FTP server before the FTP server
functions can be used. The login name and password set in the Unit Setup will
be used when connecting. The default FTP login name is “CONFIDENTIAL”
and no password is required.
The FTP server in the Ethernet Unit can connect to only one client at a time. If
a client attempts to connect when the FTP server is in use, a message will be
returned and connection will be refused.
Note When general-purpose FTP software is used, files can be transferred and
read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer.
Login Name and Password Setting
The default login name for FTP is “CONFIDENTIAL” and no password is set
for the default login, so login is possible by simply entering “CONFIDENTIAL”
as the login name. A user-set login name and password can also be set in the
User Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup).
Login Messages
Status
Normal
connection
Message
220 xxx.xx.xx.xx yyyyyyyyyy FTP server (FTP Ver-
sion z.zz) ready.
xxx.xx.xx.xx:IP address of Ethernet Unit
yyyyyyyyyy: Ethernet Unit model number (CS1W-ETN21)
z.zz: Firmware version of Ethernet Unit
FTP server
busy
221 FTP server busy, Goodbye.
Setting Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to login names and passwords.
• The login name and password must consist of alphanumeric characters,
hyphens, and/or underscores. They are not case sensitive.
• A login name consists of 12 characters.
• A password consists of 8 characters.
• Always set a password when setting a new login name. The login name
will not be valid unless a password is set for it.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the FTP Server Function
Section 4-3
• If a login name is not set or contains illegal characters, the default login
name, CONFIDENTIAL, must be used. No password is required and any
password that is set will be ignored.
FTP File Transfer Mode
FTP has two file transfer modes: ASCII mode and binary mode. Before start-
ing to transfer files, use the type command (specifies the data type of
transferred files) to select the required mode.
Always select binary mode for binary files (extensions .IOM, .STD, or .OBJ) in
the CS/CJ-series file memory and other program files (with extensions such
as .CXP).
4-3 Using the FTP Server Function
4-3-1 Procedure
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Installation and Initial Setup in the Operation Manual, Construction
of Networks (W420).
↓
2. When using a user-set FTP login name and password:
With the CX-Programmer online, select the Ethernet Unit from the I/O Table Window in
the CX-Programmer, right-click, and select Unit Setup to display the window for making
the Ethernet Unit Setup. In the CPU Bus System Setup, set the FTP login name and
FTP password.
↓
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button. The setting
data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in the CPU Unit.
↓
4. When reading from and writing to the Memory Card:
Mount the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
↓
5. Connect the Ethernet Unit using the FTP client software.
↓
6. Enter the FTP login name and password set in the Unit Setup and log into the Ethernet
Unit.
Note: Once logged in, the ftp commands can be used, such as cd (Change Directory),
and get (Obtain File).
↓
7. Search in the following directories for the required file in the Memory Card mounted to
the CPU Unit or the EM File Memory.
File memory type: Directory
Memory Card: \MEMCARD
EM File Memory: \EM
↓
8. Download the files.
↓
9. Exit the connection.
Note The Ethernet Unit will be restarted when the settings data is transferred to the
CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area, so that the new settings are read and
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the FTP Server Function
Section 4-3
become effective. Verify that it is safe for the Ethernet Unit to restart before
transferring the settings data.
4-3-2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function
Make the following settings for the unit setup when the server function is used.
CX-Programmer
tab
Settings
Setting conditions
Page
Setup
Login
User-set (when the default, CON- 71
FIDENTIAL, is not used)
Password
Port No.
User-set
Rarely required (when the default,
21, is not used)
4-3-3 Setup Tab
The CPU Bus Unit System Setup, which is set when using the FTP server
function, is shown in the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup Window.
■ Settings
Setting
Details
Default value
None
Login
Set the login name to externally connect to
the Ethernet Unit via FTP.
(CONFIDENTIAL is
used.)
Password
Port No.
Set the password to externally connect to the None
Ethernet Unit via FTP.
This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
0
(21 is used.)
FTP uses two ports: a port for control and a
port for data transfer. Set the control port
only. The data transfer port uses the value
set for the control port –1.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Server Application Example
Section 4-4
4-4 FTP Server Application Example
The following procedure shows how to use the FTP server by connection with
the default login name, CONFIDENTIAL. No password is required.
Note The login name and a password must be set in the CPU Bus Setup for the
Ethernet Unit in the CPU Unit to use any login name other than
CONFIDENTIAL.
Note When general-purpose FTP software is used, files can be transferred and
read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer.
1,2,3...
1. Make sure that a Memory Card is inserted in the CPU Unit and turn ON
the power supply to the PLC. If EM File Memory is to be used, create the
EM File Memory.
2. Connect to the FTP server from a computer on the Ethernet by entering
the text that is underlined in the following diagram.
IP address of the Ethernet Unit
$ ftp 150.31.2.83
connected to 150.31.2.83
Results
220 **IPaddress** CS1W-ETN21 FTP server(FTP**version**)ready
Name:CONFIDENTIAL
230 Guest logged in.
Login name
3. Enter FTP commands (underlined in the following diagram) to read and
write files. The following directory tree is used in this example.
/:
root
EM
MEMCARD
ABC
(subdirectory)
DEF.IOM (file)
File names read
Results
Change to MEMCARD directory
Results
Transfer DEF.IOM from ABC
directory
Results
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
4-5 Using FTP Commands
This section describes the FTP commands which the host computer (FTP
client) can send to the Ethernet Unit’s FTP server. The descriptions should
also apply to most UNIX workstations, but slight differences may arise. Refer
to your workstation’s operation manuals for details.
4-5-1 Table of Commands
The FTP commands which can be sent to the Ethernet Unit are listed in the
following table.
Command
open
user
ls
Description
Connects the specified host FTP server.
Specifies user name for the remote FTP server.
Displays the Memory Card file names.
dir
Display the Memory Card file names and details.
Changes a file name.
rename
mkdir
rmdir
cd
Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host.
Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host.
Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory.
cdup
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent direc-
tory.
pwd
Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory.
Specifies the data type of transferred files.
Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card.
Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card.
Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card.
Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card.
Disconnects the FTP server.
type
get
mget
put
mput
delete
mdelete
close
bye
Closes the FTP (client).
quit
Closes the FTP (client).
• The Ethernet Unit is considered to be the remote host and the host com-
puter (FTP client) is considered to be the local host.
• A remote file is a file on the Memory Card or in EM File Memory in the
CPU Unit. A local file is one in the host computer (FTP client).
• The parent directory is the directory one above the working directory.
4-5-2 Using the Commands
open
Format
open [IP_address or host_name_of_FTP_server]
Function
Connects the FTP server. Normally when the FTP client is booted, the FTP
server IP address is specified to execute this command automatically.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
user
Format
user [user_name]
Function
Specifies the user name. Specify the FTP login name set in the Ethernet Unit
system setup. The default FTP login name is “CONFIDENTIAL.”
If a non-default login name is used, it must be followed by the password. In
this case, enter the FTP password set in the system setup.
The user name is automatically requested immediately after connection to the
FTP server.
ls
Format
ls [-l] [REMOTE_FILE_NAME [local_file_name]]
Function
Displays the remote host (Memory Card or EM File Memory) file names.
Set the switch [-l] to display not only the file names but the creation date and
size as well. If the switch is not set, only the file names will be displayed.
You can specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory if desired.
If a local file name is specified, the file information will be stored in the speci-
fied file in the host computer.
dir
Format
dir [REMOTE_FILE_NAME [local_file_name]]
Function
Displays the file names, date created, and size of the files in the remote host
(Memory Card or EM File Memory). It displays the same information as com-
mand [ls -l].
Specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory as the remote file
name.
If a local file name is specified, the file information is stored in the specified file
in the host computer.
rename
Format
rename CURRENT_FILE_NAME NEW_FILE_NAME
Function
Changes the specified current file name to the specified new file name.
renamecan be used only to change the file name. It cannot be used to move
the file to a different directory.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
mkdir
Format
mkdir DIRECTORY_NAME
Function
Creates a directory of the specified name at the remote host (Memory Card or
EM File Memory).
An error will occur if a file or directory of the same name already exists in the
working directory.
rmdir
Format
rmdir DIRECTORY_NAME
Function
Deletes the directory of the specified name from the remote host (Memory
Card or EM File Memory).
The directory must be empty to delete it.
An error will occur if the specified directory does not exist or is empty.
pwd
Format
pwd
Function
Displays the remote host’s (Ethernet Unit) current work directory.
cd
Format
cd [directory_name]
Function
Changes the remote host (Ethernet Unit) work directory to the specified
remote directory.
The files in the Memory Card are contained in the MEMCARD directory under
the root directory (/). The files in EM File Memory are contained in the EM
directory under the root directory (/). The root directory (/) is the directory
used when logging into the Ethernet Unit. No MEMCARD directory will exist if
a Memory Card is not inserted in the PLC or if the Memory Card power indica-
tor is not lit. No EM directory will exist if EM File Memory does not exist.
cdup
Format
cdup
Function
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory (one
directory above the current working directory).
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
type
Format
type data_type
Function
Specifies the file data type. The following data types are supported:
ascii: Files are transferred as ASCII data
binary (image): Files are transferred as binary data.
All files are treated by the PLC as binary files. Before reading or writing any
files, always use the type command to set the file type to binary. File con-
tents cannot be guaranteed if transferred as ASCII data.
The default file type is ASCII.
get
Format
get FILE_NAME [receive_file_name]
Function
Transfers the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory
to the local host.
A receive file name can be used to specify the name of the file in the local
host.
mget
Format
mget FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to transfer multiple remote files from
the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host.
put
Format
put file_name [DESTINATION_FILE_NAME]
Function
Transfers the specified local file to the remote host (Memory Card or EM File
Memory).
A destination file name can be used to specify the name the file is stored
under in the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
Any existing file with the same name in the remote host (Memory Card or EM
File Memory) will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file.
If an error occurs during file transfer, the file being transferred will be deleted
and the transmission will end in an error.
mput
Format
mput FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to transfer multiple local files to the
remote host (Memory Card or EM File Memory).
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
Any existing file with the same name in the remote host (Memory Card or EM
File Memory) will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file.
If an error occurs during file transfer, the file being transferred will be deleted
and the transmission of that file will end in an error. However, mput execution
will continue and remaining files will be transferred.
delete
Format
deleteFILE_NAME
Function
Deletes the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
mdelete
Format
mdelete FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to delete multiple remote files from
the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
close
Format
close
Function
Disconnects the Ethernet Unit’s FTP server.
bye
Format
bye
Function
Ends the FTP (client).
quit
Format
quit
Function
Ends the FTP (client).
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 4-5
4-5-3 Error Messages and FTP Status
Error Messages
The error messages returned by the Ethernet Unit are listed in the following
table.
Message
Meaning
PPP is a directory.
The path name indicated at PPP is a directory.
The path name indicated at PPP is not a directory.
Another Unit currently has the access right.
PPP is not a directory.
Another unit has access authority
(FINS error 0 x 3001).
Bad sequence of commands.
The RNFR command has not been executed.
Can't create data socket (X.X.X.X, YY).
Cannot access to device (FINS error 0 x 250F).
Cannot get memory blocks.
A socket cannot be created.
A file device error has occurred.
A message memory block cannot be allocated.
The command format is incorrect.
Command format error (FINS error 0 x 1003).
Connect error.
A connection error has occurred.
Directories of old and new paths are not same.
Directory name length exceeded max. size.
Directory not empty (FINS error 0 x 2108).
Fatal error (FINS error 0 x 1101).
The directories before and after changing the name are different.
The directory name is too long.
The directory must be empty to delete it.
A parameter error has occurred.
Fatal error (FINS error 0 x 1103).
File or directory already exists.
The specified file or directory name already exists.
The file or directory name is incorrect.
File or directory already exists
(FINS error 0 x 2107).
File or directory name illegal.
File or directory name illegal
(FINS error 0 x 110C).
File read error (FINS error 0 x 1104).
File read error (FINS error 0 x 110B).
File write error (FINS error 0 x 2106).
File write error (FINS error 0 x 2107).
FINS error MRES 0 x XX: SRES 0 x XX.
Length of directory name too long.
No space to create entry (FINS error 0 x 2103).
No such device (FINS error 0 x 2301).
No such file or directory.
An error occurs when reading the file.
An error occurs when reading the file.
Some other FINS error has occurred.
The path name of the directory is too long.
There are too many files to create a new one.
The file device cannot be found.
The specified file or directory does not exist.
No such file or directory (FINS error 0 x 2006).
No such file or directory (FINS error 0 x 2106).
Not enough memory.
The communications buffers are full.
The file device is full.
Not enough space in the system.
(FINS error 1104).
PLC communication error (timeout).
Socket canceled.
File access timed out.
The socket was canceled.
Socket error NN.
A socket bind error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
A data reception error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
A data send error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
Socket receive error NN.
Socket send error NN.
Timeout (900 seconds): closing control connection. The connection was closed because the client did not respond for 15
minutes.
Too many open files.
Too many sockets have been created.
Writing is not possible.
Write access denied.
Write access denied. (FINS error 0 x 2101).
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking FTP Status
Section 4-6
PPP: Path name
XXX: IP address
YY: Port number
MM: FINS error code
NN: Socket error code
4-6 Checking FTP Status
4-6-1 FTP Status Flag
The current status of the FTP server can be obtained from the service status
in the words allocated to the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the
CIO Area. The word containing the FTP Status Flag can be computed as fol-
lows: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 17
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+17
FTP Status Flag
Meaning
Status of
bit 00
1
0
FTP server busy (a user is connected)
FTP server free
Note
1. File operations for files on the Memory Card are performed during FTP
communications. Do not remove the Memory Card or turn OFF power to
the PLC while FTP is being used.
2. When using File Memory Instruction from the program in the CPU Unit,
program exclusive control using the FTP Status Flag so that the same data
is not manipulated simultaneously by more than one instruction.
3. The FTP status can also be checked using the software switch settings on
the CX-Programmer.
■ FTP Indicator
The FTP indicator on the Ethernet Unit indicates FTP status as shown in the
following table.
FTP indicator
Meaning
FTP server busy (a user is connected)
FTP server free
Lit
Not lit
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 4-7
4-7 Using File Memory
There are two media that can be used to store files in memory for CS/CJ-
series PLCs:
• Memory Cards
• EM File Memory
CPU Unit
File
Memory Card
File
File
EM File
Memory
File
4-7-1 File Memory
Media
CS/CJ-
series
Memory
Cards
Memory type
Flash memory 8 MB
15 MB
Capacity
Model
HMC-EF861
File data recognized by CPU Unit
• Complete user program
• Specified portions of I/O Memory
• Parameter area data (e.g. PLC
Setup)
HMC-EF171
HMC-EF371
30 MB
EM File
Memory
RAM
Max. capacity of EM Area All EM Area banks
in CPU Unit
from specified bank in
I/O Memory (specified
in PLC Setup)
4-7-2 File Types
■ File Names
Files are distinguished by assigning file names and extensions. The following
characters can be used in file names and extensions:
Alphanumeric characters: A to Z and 0 to 9. (Names converted to all-caps)
! & $ # ’ [ ] - ^ ( ) _
The following characters cannot be used in files names and extensions:
, . / ? * ” : ; < > = + (spaces)
File names are not case sensitive and will be converted to all-caps in the PLC
file system. File names can be up to 8 character long with 3-character exten-
sions. An error will occur if a file name or extension is too long. The first period
(.) in a file name will be taken as the delimiter between the file name and
extension. Extensions are determined by the file type.
■ Directories
Up to five levels of directories (including root as the first level) can be created
as file storage locations. A maximum of 65 characters can be used in direc-
tory names.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 4-7
File Names Handled by CPU Unit
The files described in the following table can be read or written by the CPU
Unit.
File type
Data file
File name
Extension
Contents
Description
********
.IOM
Specified ranges of I/ • Contains word (16-bit) data from a starting
O Memory
word through an end word in one memory
area.
• The following areas can be used: CIO, HR,
WR, AR, DM, and EM.
Program file
********
********
.OBJ
.STD
Complete user pro-
gram
• Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks, as well as task infor-
mation for one CPU Unit.
Parameter area file
• PLC Setup
• Registered I/O
tables
• Contains all of the parameter data for one
CPU Unit.
• There is no need for the user to distinguish
the various types of data contained in the
file.
• The file can be automatically read to or
written from the CPU Unit simply by speci-
fying the extension (.STD)
• Routing tables
• CPU Bus Unit
Setup and other
setup data
Files
trans-
ferred at
startup
Data files
AUTOEXEC .IOM
I/O Memory data for
the specified number
of words starting from
D20000
• There does not necessarily need to be a
data file in the Memory Card when the
automatic file transfer function is used at
startup.
• The AUTOEXEC.IOM file always contains
DM Area data starting at D20000.
• All data in the file will be transferred to
memory starting at D20000 at startup.
Program
files
AUTOEXEC .OBJ
Complete user pro-
gram
• There must be a program file in the Mem-
ory Card when the automatic file transfer
function is used at startup.
• Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks, as well as task infor-
mation for one CPU Unit.
Parameter AUTOEXEC .STD
area file
• PLC Setup
• Registered I/O
tables
• There must be a parameter file in the
Memory Card when the automatic file
transfer function is used at startup.
• Contains all of the parameter data for one
CPU Unit.
• There is no need for the user to distinguish
the various types of data contained in the
file.
• Routing tables
• CPU Bus Unit
Setup and other
setup data
• All parameters in the file will be automati-
cally transferred to specified locations in
memory at startup.
Note
1. Refer to information on file memory in the CS/CJ-series Programmable
Controllers Operation Manual (W339).
2. All files transferred automatically at startup must have the name
AUTOEXEC.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 4-7
4-7-3 Initializing File Memory
Memory
Initialization method
Memory
Cards
1. Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card from a Programming Device
(Programming Consoles included).
EM File Mem- 1. Specify in the PLC Setup the first bank to convert to file memory.
ory
2. Initialize EM File Memory from the CX-Programmer.
4-7-4 I/O Memory Data Format
■ IOM Format
The IOM format is a data format used for binary data specified by the ladder
instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit.
If five words of data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadeci-
mal, 9ABC hexadecimal, etc.) is contained in an attached file in IOM format,
the data will be stored in the attached file as shown in the following diagram.
Example: Binary data format with a delimiter after every 10 fields.
I/O memory
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
.IOM file contents
XX XX
XX 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE F0 12 34
48 bytes
(Reserved by the system.)
■ TXT Format
The TXT format is a data format (using tab delimiters) specified by the ladder
instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit. The format is configured according to the
specified FREAD(700) and FWRIT(701) parameters, as follows:
Data format
Use of CRs and CR position
• Words without delimiters
• No CRs
• Double words without delimiters • CR after every 10 fields.
• Words delimited by tabs. • CR after each field.
• Double words delimited by tabs • CR after every 2 fields.
• CR after every 4 fields.
• CR after every 5 fields.
• CR after every 16 fields.
If data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadecimal, 9ABC
hexadecimal, etc.) is contained in an attached file in TXT format, the data will
be converted into ASCII format in words or double-words. The words are
delimited by inserting tabs ([HT]: 09), and carriage returns (CR) after specified
fields ([CR][LF]: 0D0A).
Example: Data format using words delimited by tabs and CRs after every 10 fields.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 4-7
I/O memory
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
.TXT file contents
31 32 33 34 09 35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09
1
2
3
4 [HT] 5
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 09
8 [CR][LF] 9 C [HT]
6
7
8 [HT] 9
A
B
C [HT]
5
6
7
A
B
.TXT file displayed as text
1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678
9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0
@...[HT]: Used to display tab space when displayed as text.
■ CSV Format
The CSV format is a data format (using comma delimiters) that is specified by
ladder instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit. The CSV format is configured according to
the specified FREAD(700) and FWRIT(701) parameters, as follows:
Data format
Use of CRs and CR position
Words delimited by commas.
• No CRs
• CR after every 10 fields.
• CR after each field.
• CR after every 2 fields.
• CR after every 4 fields.
• CR after every 5 fields.
• CR after every 16 fields.
Double words delimited by com-
mas.
If word data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadecimal, up
to DEF0 hexadecimal) is contained in an attached file in CSV format, the word
data will be converted into ASCII format in word or double-word units. The
words are delimited by inserting comma delimiters (',':2C), and CRs after
specified fields ([CR][LF]: 0D0A).
Example: Data format using words delimited by commas with CRs after every
10 fields.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 4-7
I/O memory
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
.CSV file contents
31 32 33 34 2C 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C
1
2
3
4
,
5
6
7
8
,
9
A
B
C
,
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 2C
8 [CR] [LF] 9
5
6
7
A
B
C
,
.TXT file displayed as text
1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678
9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0
Note FREAD(700) will not be able to read the last byte in a file that has been written
to the Memory Card if the file contains an odd number of bytes. Add 00 hexa-
decimal to the end of the file if necessary to write an even number of bytes to
the Memory Card.
Note The UM and DM Areas contain binary data. Set the data type to binary using
the type command before reading or writing files using FTP.
Note For details on how to use File Memory Instructions, refer to the CS/CJ Series
Instructions Reference Manual (W340).
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP File Transfer Time
Section 4-8
4-8 FTP File Transfer Time
File transfers using FTP can require 30 or 40 minutes depending on the
capacity of the file. Approximate file transfer time are provided in the following
table for reference.
All times are in seconds unless otherwise specified.
■ CS1 CPU Units/CJ1 CPU Units
File system
Memory Card
EM File Memory
CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM
RUN
PROGRAM
RUN
Cycle time
1 KB
---
20 ms
6.0 s
---
20 ms
2.9 s
Transfers using
put
0.7 s
4.5 s
7.4 s
14.4 s
0.3 s
2.8 s
4.9 s
9.6 s
0.4 s
2.5 s
5.0 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
1 KB
38.3 s
72.1 s
21.5 s
44.7 s
120.8 s
0.8 s
141.4 s 11.0 s
Transfers using
get
1.4 s
0.2 s
1.9 s
3.8 s
8.6 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
19.3 s
37.6 s
75.7 s
11.4 s
26.7 s
68.2 s
■ CS1-H CPU Units/CJ1-H CPU Units
File system
Memory Card
EM File Memory
CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM
RUN
PROGRAM
RUN
Cycle time
1 KB
---
20 ms
1.9 s
---
20 ms
1.0 s
6.5 s
12.8 s
27.4 s
0.4 s
3.8 s
7.6 s
20.4 s
Transfers using
put
0.3 s
1.5 s
2.6 s
4.9 s
0.2 s
1.3 s
2.5 s
4.9 s
0.2 s
0.8 s
1.5 s
3.2 s
0.2 s
1.1 s
1.9 s
4.2 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
1 KB
11.5 s
21.4 s
41.2 s
0.6 s
Transfers using
get
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
6.5 s
12.6 s
24.9 s
Note
1. The above times assume that the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the
PLC Setup is set to the default value of 4%.
2. If the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is increased, FTP
files will be transferred faster.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIX Application Example
Section 4-9
4-9 UNIX Application Example
The following procedure provides an example of FTP operations from a UNIX
workstation. In this example, the following assumptions are made.
• The IP address of the Ethernet Unit is registered in /etc/hosts on the
workstation as [cs1].
• The default FTP login name is being used (CONFIDENTIAL).
• A processing results data file called RESULT.IOM already exists on the
Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
• A processing instructions data file called PLAN.IOM already exists on the
workstation.
The following procedure transfers the processing results file RESULT.IOM
from the Memory Card in the CPU Unit to the workstation and then the
processing instructions file PLAN.IOM is transferred from the workstation to
the Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
Underlined text is keyed in from the FTP client. The workstation prompt is
indicated as $ and the cursor is indicated as ■.
1,2,3...
1. Start FTP and connect to the Ethernet Unit.
FTP started.
21
2. Enter the login name.
Login name
3. Make sure the Memory Card is inserted. The MEMCARD directory will be
displayed if there is a Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
Used to check for Memory Card.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIX Application Example
Section 4-9
4. Change to the MEMCARD directory.
Change to MEMCARD directory.
5. Change data type to binary.
Binary data type set.
6. Transfer the file RESULT.IOM to the workstation.
File read.
7. Write the file PLAN.IOM to the Memory Card.
File written
8. End FTP.
FTP ended.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIX Application Example
Section 4-9
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5
Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
This section provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function, including details on specifications, required
5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function. . . . .
5-2-3 Auto Adjust Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment (SNTP) Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 Troubleshooting Automatic Clock Adjustment Errors with Indicators
5-4-3 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
90
90
91
91
91
92
93
94
94
94
94
95
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 5-1
5-1 Overview
5-1-1 Overview
The Ethernet Unit can obtain the clock information from the SNTP server (see
note 1) at a particular time or when a designated bit turns ON and then
refresh the internal clock information of the CPU Unit to which it is mounted
(referred to as the local CPU Unit).
Intranet
SNTP server
Automatic clock adjustment
The clock information can be broadcast
to other CPU Units on the same Network.
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
24: 00: 00
Clock data is obtained from the
SNTP server and written at a particular
time ro when a designated bit turns ON.
Note
(1) The SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server is used to control the
time on the LAN.
(2) An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock
adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table.
CPU Unit
Conditions
CPU Units manufactured on or
When the CPU execution mode is set to other
before January 31, 2003 (lot num- than normal mode (priority peripheral servicing
bers 030131 or earlier):
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
mode, parallel processing with synchronous
memory access mode, or parallel processing
with asynchronous memory access mode).
AND
When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to
RUN or MONITOR mode.
(3) The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the
side or top corner of the CPU Unit.
(4) The lot numbers are as follows:
YYMMDDnnnn, in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year, MM
the month, DD the day, and nnnn the serial number.
(5) In accordance with SNTP protocol specifications, automatic adjustment
will not be possible from February 7, 2036. In Ethernet Units, this function
will no longer operate from February 7, 2036 (this status will not be dis-
played as error information).
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 5-2
5-1-2 Specifications
Item
Specification
Protocol
SNTP
123 (UDP)
Port number
Can also be set from the CX-Programmer in the Unit Setup.
Adjustment timing
Automatic (fixed time) and manual (manual only cannot be
set)
Access to SNTP
server
Writes the clock information
from the SNTP server to the
local CPU Unit.
Obtains the clock information
from the SNTP server set up
on the Network, and applies
the information obtained to
the local CPU Unit.
Refresh timing
When the automatic clock adjustment switch is turned from
OFF to ON and at a specified time.
5-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
5-2-1 Procedure
1.
Make the basic settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Installation and Initial Setup in the Ethernet Units Operation Man-
ual Construction of Networks (W420).
↓
2.
With the CX-Programmer online, set the following items in the Unit Setup (CPU Unit
System Setup).
• SNTP server specification (required)
• Access to the SNTP server is enabled when writing clock information from the SNTP
server to the local CPU Unit when the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is turned
from OFF to ON and at a set automatic adjustment time.
• Automatic clock adjustment setting
↓
3.
4.
To perform automatic clock adjustment manually, turn the Automatic Clock Adjustment
Switch from OFF to ON.
n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
↓
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu and click the Yes Button. The Unit
Setup (CPU Bus System Setup) will be transferred to the CPU Unit (the setting data will
be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area).
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 5-2
5-2-2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
The following settings must be set in the Unit Setup when using the automatic
clock adjustment function.
CX-
Programmer
tab
Settings
Setting conditions
Reference
Auto Adjust
Time
Server specification
type
Required.
5-2-3 Auto Adjust
Time on page 93
IP Address
Host name
One or the other is
required, depending
on the Server specifi-
cation type setting.
Port No.
Rarely required.
(Change when a set-
ting other than the
default setting of 123
is required.)
Get the time informa- Required.
tion from the SNTP
server
Auto Adjust Time
Retry timer
Optional
Optional (Change
when the default set-
ting of 10 seconds is
unacceptable.)
Adjust Time
IP Address
Port No.
Optional
DNS (See
note.)
Required.
1-4 Common Proto-
col Settings on
page 4
Rarely required.
(Change when a set-
ting other than the
default setting of 53
is required.)
Retry timer
Optional (Change
when the default set-
ting of 10 seconds is
unacceptable.)
Note
When the Server specification type field in Auto Adjust Time Tab is set to Host
name.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 5-2
5-2-3 Auto Adjust Time
The contents in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup that are set for using mail
send and receive functions are shown in the CX-Programmer’s Unit Setup.
Item
Contents
Default
Get the time
information from SNTP server's clock.
the SNTP
Enable to set the CPU Unit's clock to the time at the Not
selected
(disabled)
The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to
server
which the Ethernet Unit is mounted.
Auto Adjust
Time
Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be
accessed to synchronize the clocks.
0:0:0
When the time that is set here arrives, the SNTP
server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is
adjusted to match the SNTP server clock.
Server specifi-
cation type
Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic IP Address
clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or
by host domain name (i.e., by host name).
IP Address
Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be 0.0.0.0
used for automatic clock adjustment.
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by IP address has been selected.
Host name
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host name) for
the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic
clock adjustment.
None
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by host name has been selected.
Port No.
Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP
server that is to be used for automatic clock adjust-
ment. This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
0
(Number
123 is
used.)
Retry timer
Adjust Time
Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec- 0
tion to the SNTP server fails. This setting does not
normally need to be changed.
(10 s)
This sets in the CPU Unit's clock data the time differ- +0:0
ence made up from the SNTP server's clock data.
To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it
is, input 0.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch
Section 5-3
5-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch
The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is allocated in the CIO Area as
shown below. The first word n of the CIO Area is calculated using the follow-
ing equation.
n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch
(Bit 04 of n)
The Unit control bit is shown in the following diagram.
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
n
Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch
When the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch turns from OFF to ON, the
Ethernet Unit obtains the clock data from the SNTP server on the network,
and applies it to the local CPU Unit. After applying the data, the switch auto-
matically turns OFF again.
5-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
5-4-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment (SNTP) Errors
The following table shows the main causes and remedies for errors that occur
in the automatic clock adjustment function (SNTP).
Cause
Correction
SNTP, DNS server address not set
Reset each server address (IP address or
host name).
SNTP, DNS server communications time- Inspect the communications path (Ether-
out
net Unit, cable connections, hub, router,
server), and correct the situation that is
causing the error.
CPU Unit internal clock could not be set The automatic clock adjustment function
is not supported by certain CPU Units
(models, lot numbers) if they are in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
5-4-2 Troubleshooting Automatic Clock Adjustment Errors with
Indicators
RUN ERC ERH LNK HOST
Probable cause
Correction
ON --- ON --- Flash- The server (DNS,
Read the error status
and error log, and
reset the data in
which the error
occurred. If the error
occurs again,
ing
SNTP) settings in
the Unit Setup are
incorrect.
replace the CPU
Unit.
OFF ---
Flash- A Network failure
Inspect the commu-
nications path
ing
has occurred in the
communications
path, causing an
access timeout.
(Ethernet Unit, cable
connections, hub,
router, server), and
correct the situation
that is causing the
error.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
Section 5-4
Note
For details on other error log information, refer to the Operation Manual, Con-
struction of Networks: SECTION 8 Troubleshooting.
5-4-3 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment
Function
When an error occurs while the Ethernet Unit is operating, the error code,
detailed error code, and time the error occurred are saved in the error log.
The following table provides a list of the error codes.
The error log can be read by sending FINS commands to the Ethernet Unit or
by using the mail receive function and specifying the ErrorLogRead com-
mand.
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
Correction
EEPROM
1st byte
2nd byte
021A
Logic error 00
in setting
table
01: Data link
table
Recreate the data Saved
specified by the
2nd byte of the
detailed error
02: Network
parameters
code.
03: Routing
tables
04: Setup
05: CPU Bus
Unit Words
(CIO/DM)
03C1
03C4
Server set- 00: DNS 01: IP address
Set the server
settings correctly
based on the
information in the
detailed error
code.
---
ting error
01: SMTP
02: POP3
03: SNTP
02: Host name
03: Port number
04: Other
parameters
Server
connection
error
00: DNS 01: Specified
Take either of the ---
following mea-
sures.
host does not
01: SMTP
exist
02: POP3
02: No service
03: SNTP
• Correct the set-
at specified host tings for each
server.
03: Timeout
• Inspect the com-
munications
04: Closed uni-
laterally by host
path (Ethernet
Unit, cable con-
nections, hub,
router, server),
and correct the
situation that is
causing the
05: Cannot con-
nect because
account infor-
mation does not
match
06: Host name
resolution error
error.
07: Transmis-
sion error
08: Reception
error
09: Other error
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
Section 5-4
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte 2nd byte
Clock data 0001: Clock data could not Clear the CPU
Correction
EEPROM
03C6
---
write error be refreshed because of a
CPU Unit error.
Unit error.
0002: Clock data could not The automatic
---
be refreshed because the
CPU Unit could not write
clock adjustment
function is not
clock data in that operation supported by cer-
mode.
tain CPU Units
(models, lot num-
bers) if they are in
RUN or MONI-
TOR mode.
(See note.)
Note
(1) For details on other error log information, refer to the Operation Manual,
Construction of Networks: SECTION 8 Troubleshooting.
(2) An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock
adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table.
CPU Unit
Conditions
CPU Units manufactured on or
When the CPU execution mode is set to other
before January 31, 2003 (lot num- than normal mode (priority peripheral servicing
bers 030131 or earlier):
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
mode, parallel processing with synchronous
memory access mode, or parallel processing
with asynchronous memory access mode).
AND
When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to
RUN or MONITOR mode.
(3) The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the
side or top corner of the CPU Unit.
(4) The lot numbers are as follows:
YYMMDDnnnn, in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year, MM
the month, DD the day, and nnnn the serial number.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6
Socket Services
6-1 Overview of Socket Communications from Ethernet Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 What are Sockets?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Socket Port Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Differences between TCP and UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Opening TCP Sockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3 Fragmentation of Send Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Socket Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Using Socket Services with Socket Service Request Switches . . . .
6-3-3 Using Socket Services with CMND(490). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4 Specific Socket Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-5 Differences with Previous Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Socket Service Function Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Executing CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Using Socket Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Settings Required for Socket Service Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3 Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Socket Service Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-1 CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-2 DM Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-2 Socket Services and Socket Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-3 Socket Service Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-4 Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-6 Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-7 Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-8 TCP/IP Communications Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-9 UDP/IP Communications Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99
99
100
100
100
102
103
103
104
105
105
106
106
106
106
107
107
107
108
110
110
111
112
112
113
115
117
119
120
125
127
131
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8 Using Socket Services with CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-1 Using Socket Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-2 Socket Services and Socket Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-3 Basic FINS Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-4 Response Codes in the Command Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-5 Response Codes in the Results Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-6 Communications Timing Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-7 Socket Service Timing Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-8 TCP/IP Communications Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8-9 UDP/IP Communications Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Precautions in Using Socket Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-1 UDP and TCP Socket Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-2 UDP Socket Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-3 TCP Socket Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-4 Precautions in Using Socket Service Request Switches . . . . . . . . . .
6-9-5 Maximum Transmission Delays (Ignoring other Network Delays) .
136
136
137
138
139
139
139
139
141
149
155
155
155
155
156
157
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Socket Communications from Ethernet Units
Section 6-1
6-1 Overview of Socket Communications from Ethernet Units
6-1-1 What are Sockets?
Sockets are interfaces that allow TCP and UDP protocols to be used directly
from the user program. With personal computers, socket are provided as C
language interface libraries, which allow TCP or UDP protocols to be
programming using library functions. With UNIX computers, socket interfaces
are supported in the form of system calls.
The CS/CJ-series PLCs support the socket service from the user program.
The user program requests service functions either by manipulating Socket
Service Request Switches in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area or by
sending FINS commands to the Ethernet Unit by executing CMND(490)
instruction in the ladder diagram.
Socket communications services can be used to transfer arbitrary data
between a PLC and a host computer or between two PLCs. The Ethernet
supports two socket services: a UDP socket service and a TCP socket
service.
■ Using Sockets with the Ethernet Unit
The Ethernet Unit supports up to 16 simultaneous socket connections for the
socket services, 8 each for UDP and TCP sockets.
Socket numbers 1 to 8 are assigned to sockets for both UDP and TCP
sockets. Sockets are managed from the ladder-diagram program by assigning
a socket port for each socket number. The socket port number is assigned
when the socket is opened.
Socket ports are
assigned to socket
numbers.
UDP socket
port 1
UDP socket 1
UDP open request
Socket
services
Sockets
TCP socket 8
TCP socket
port 65535
6-1-2 Socket Port Numbers
Port numbers up to 1023 on a UNIX workstation can be used by the
superuser only. Port numbers 0 to 255 are reserved for well-known ports.
Consequently, port numbers 1024 and above should be used for socket
services. The Ethernet Unit does not support port #0.
Some port numbers over 1024 may be reserved on some workstations (for
example, the X-window server is port #6000). Do not use port numbers that
are already reserved for other processes.
The setting status of the UNIX workstation port numbers can be checked in /
etc/services.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protocol Overview
Section 6-2
6-2 Protocol Overview
6-2-1 Differences between TCP and UDP
There are differences in the socket services between TCP and UDP.
■ TCP Communications
The following procedure is followed each time data is transmitted to ensure
that the data arrives normally at the remote node:
1,2,3...
1. The remote node returns ACK when data is received normally.
2. The local node sends the next data after it receives ACK, or it resends the
same data if ACK is not returned within the specified time.
Transmitted data
Receive
Send
request
made.
request
ACK (acknowledge)
made.
Resent data
when ACK is not returned
Local node
Remote node
With the TCP protocol, the remote IP address and remote TCP port number
are specified when an open request is made for a socket. When a send
request is made, the number of bytes to send and the send data are specified.
When a receive request is made, the number of bytes to receive is specified.
With the TCP protocol, communications with another remote device are not
possible until the socket that was opened has been closed.
■ UDP Communications
Data is simply sent to the remote node. Unlike TCP, the reception of data is
not checked and data is not resent. To increase communication reliability, data
resends must be programmed by the user in user application.
Transmitted data
Receive
request
made.
Send
request
made.
ACK (acknowledge: only when
processed by application)
Local node
Remote node
With the UDP protocol, the remote IP address and remote UDP port number
are not specified when an open request is made for a socket. When a send
request is made, the remote IP address, the remote UDP port number, the
number of bytes to send, and the send data are specified. When a receive
request is made, the number of bytes to receive is specified. (The response
data shows from which IP address and UDP port number the received data
was sent.)
With the UDP protocol, communications with another remote device are
possible even if the socket that was opened is not closed.
6-2-2 Opening TCP Sockets
To achieve highly reliable data communications, TCP establishes a virtual
communications circuit between the two nodes before starting data
transmissions. The virtual communications circuit is known as a “connection.”
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protocol Overview
Section 6-2
■ Passive OPEN and Active OPEN
An open command is executed for a node to establish a connection. The open
method differs depending on whether the node is a client or server. A passive
open method is used to open the node as a server and the active open
method is used to open the node as a client.
Active
open
Passive
open
Client
TCP
socket
Server
TCP
socket
Connection
Note
1. TCP sockets must be closed once a connection has been made before
communications are possible with other TCP sockets. This is true for other
server and client sockets. Up to eight TCP sockets can be open simulta-
neously.
2. With UDP sockets, communications are possible with more than one other
UDP socket.
3. When a connection is made between two nodes, the process at the node
providing a service is called the server, and the process at the node re-
questing the service is called the client. The server is started first and waits
for a service request from a client. The client requests to the server that a
connection be opened and then transmits data. When the TCP protocol is
used, however, the client–server relationship does not need to be pro-
grammed in the application because it is automatically handled by the pro-
tocol.
TCP Communications Procedure
The communications procedure is shown below for communications between
a host computer and Ethernet Unit using a TCP socket. In this example, the
host computer is the server and the Ethernet Unit is the client.
Host computer
(server)
Ethernet Unit
(client)
Passive open
Active open
Connection requested
Connection established
Connection established
Data send request
Send next data
Send data
ACK (acknowledge)
Data receive request
Data send request
Send data
ACK (acknowledge)
Next data receive request
Close
Data receive request
Close
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protocol Overview
Section 6-2
6-2-3 Fragmentation of Send Data
The Ethernet Unit fragments data for TCP transmission into units of 1,024
bytes and data for UDP transmission into units of 1,472 bytes. TCP requires
one reception request to receive each unit of data. UDP, however, restores the
original data before passing it to the user process, allowing all the data in a
single transmission to be received with one reception request.
■ Cautions when Using TCP
An example of the fragmentation and transmission of data using the TCP is
shown in the following illustration.
1,2,3...
1. The sending user program sends a request to send 1,984 bytes of data.
2. The Ethernet Unit fragments the send data into Data A with 1,024 bytes
and Data B with 960 bytes.
3. Data A and Data B are sent consecutively.
4. The receiving user program sends a request to receive 1,984 bytes of data.
However, only data A is sent in the first packet, and data B is not received.
5. Another receive request to receive data must be made before the remain-
ing data, Data B, is received.
Sending User Program
Ethernet Unit
Receiving Node
Data A
Receiving Computer
4. First receive request
1,984bytes
1. Send request
1,984 bytes
1,024 bytes
Data A
Source data
Data A
Only first
1,024 bytes
Data B
960 bytes
5. Second receive request
1,984 bytes
2. Data separated
Data B
Data B
3. Data A and
Data B sent
consecutively.
Remaining
960 bytes
When using TCP protocol, the fragmented data is passed to the user
program. Therefore, the receiving user program must be able to evaluate the
end of the data transmission, and repeatedly send receive requests until all
data has been received. The receive request is sent twice in the example
shown above, but the data would be even more fragmented if a router was
included in the communications path, and the number of receive requests
would need to be increased accordingly.
When making the receive request, it is not necessary to specify the same data
length as the sent data length. For example, if the length setting is shorter
than the actual length of the data, all the data can be received by repeating
the receive requests.
Note If communications are with a different segment and data is sent via the TCP
protocol, data will be fragmented into units of 536 bytes.
■ Cautions when Using UDP
An example of fragmentation and transmission of data using the UDP is
shown in the following illustration.
1,2,3...
1. The transmission user program sends a request to send 1,984 bytes of da-
ta.
2. The Ethernet Unit fragments the send data into Data A with 1,472 bytes
and Data B with 512 bytes.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 6-3
3. Data A and Data B are sent consecutively.
4. When the receiving user program sends a request to receive 1,984 bytes
of data, Data A and Data B are linked to restore the original data, which is
passed to the user program.
Sending User Program
Ethernet Unit
Receiving Node
Receiving User Program
1. Send request
1,984bytes
1,472 bytes
Data A
Source data
4. First receive request
1,984 bytes
Data B
Data A
Data B
512 bytes
2.
3.
As shown above, the UDP protocol handles data communications as
datagrams, so that the send data is restored to the original data before being
passed to the user program. Consequently, if the data length in the receive
request is set to the length of the send data, the entire data can be received
using a single receive data request. However, if the data length in the receive
data request is set smaller than the actual length of the data, all received data
exceeding the set data length will be discarded.
6-3 Overview
6-3-1 Socket Service Functions
The Ethernet Unit’s socket services are used to exchange data between the
PLC and general-purpose applications that do not support FINS message
communications.The socket services can be used by CS/CJ-series PLCs
through the user program by manipulating dedicated control bits (called
Socket Service Request Switches) or by executing the CMND(490)
instruction.
Intranet
General-purpose application
(not FINS communications);
The host computer uses system calls to call sockets
provided in a C language interface library to allow
TCP and UDP protocols to be used directly to access
PLC data.
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
The program in the CPU Unit sends requests to the
User-set data
Ethernet Unit to open/close sockets or send/receive
data. This is achieved by manipulating dedicated
control bits or executing CMND(490), and allows the
CPU Unit to exchange data with the host computer
by using UDP or TCP protocols directly.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 6-3
The two methods of using the socket services are as follows:
• Dedicated Control Bits (Socket Service Request Switches)
Requests can be made to a socket service by setting parameters and
then merely manipulating specific Socket Service Request Switches.
• CMND(490)
Requests can be made to a socket service by sending service request
commands to the Ethernet Unit.
Note One of the main differences between using Socket Service Request Switches
and using CMND(490) is in the number of sockets that can be connected
simultaneously, as shown in the following table.
Protocol
Socket Service Request
Switches
CMND(490)
UDP
TCP
Total of 8 sockets max.
8 sockets max.
8 sockets max.
6-3-2 Using Socket Services with Socket Service Request Switches
Socket services can be used by setting the parameters in a Socket Service
Parameter Area in the CPU Bus Unit Area and then turning ON a Socket
Service Request Switch.
When using Socket Service Request Switches, a maximum of 8 sockets can
be opened simultaneously for the UDP and TCP combined. Also, the same
socket number cannot be used simultaneously for both UDP and TCP. (There
is only one Socket Service Parameter Area for each socket, i.e., the same
area must be used for both UDP and TCP.)
An illustration of using Socket Service Request Switches to execute socket
services is provided below.
CS/CJ-series PLC
Host computer or other device
CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
TCP data
transfers
User program
System
call
Socket Service
Request Switches
UDP data
transfers
Refreshed
(See Note 1.)
Socket Service
Parameters
Refreshed
(See Note 2.)
Note
1. Socket Service Request Switches in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO
Area are used to send a service request from the CPU Unit to the Ethernet
Unit.
2. The Socket Service Parameters in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area
are used to specify the service being requested from the Ethernet Unit.
The CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area is also used to receive results of
processing from the Ethernet Unit to the CPU Unit.
After setting the required parameters in a Socket Service Parameter Area in
the CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area, the Socket Service Request Switches
can be used to request opening, sending, receiving, or closing for either the
UDP or TCP protocol. When requesting a send, send data at the send/receive
data addresses set in the parameter area is sent. When requesting a
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 6-3
reception, data is received to the send/receive data addresses set in the
parameter area.
6-3-3 Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Service request commands can be sent to the Ethernet Unit by executing the
CMND(490) instruction in the ladder diagram. CS/CJ Ethernet Units support
the same functionality as the CVM1/CV-series Ethernet Unit, so heritage
programs can be easily corrected and reused.
Up to 16 sockets can be connected using CMND(490): 8 UDP sockets and
8 TCP sockets.
The socket service request commands that can be used are listed in the
following table. Refer to Section 7 FINS Commands Addressed to Ethernet
Units in the Operation Manual, Construction of Networks for details.
Command code
MRC SRC
27
Name
01
02
03
04
10
11
12
13
14
UDP OPEN REQUEST
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST
UDP SEND REQUEST
UDP CLOSE REQUEST
TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST
TCP ACTIVE OPEN REQUEST
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
TCP SEND REQUEST
TCP CLOSE REQUEST
Requests sent to the Ethernet Unit by sending commands through execution
of CMND(40), and when the Unit receives a command, it will return a
response. The response does not, however, indicate that processing has
been completed, and the status of the flags in the Socket Status Words
allocated to the Unit must be used to determine when processing has been
completed.
The results of processing will be stored in the words specified when
CMND(490) was executed once the requested processing has been
completed.
6-3-4 Specific Socket Service Functions
The socket service functions listed in the following table can be executed
either using Socket Service Request Switches or using CMND(490).
Protocol
UDP
Socket service request
Open UDP socket
Receive via UDP socket
Send via UDP socket
Close UDP socket
TCP
Open TCP socket, passive
Open TCP socket, active
Receive via TCP socket
Send via TCP socket
Close TCP socket
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Socket Service Function Guide
Section 6-4
6-3-5 Differences with Previous Models
Compared with the socket service functions of previous models (CS1W-
ETN01/11 and CJ1W-ETN11 Ethernet Units), the Number of Bytes Received
at the TCP Socket that stores the size of received data accumulated in the
reception buffer and a related Data Received Flag have been added. These
new features eliminate the need for ladder programs to monitor the timing for
completion of instructions and socket service processing, and thus reduce the
amount of labor required for program development.
6-4 Socket Service Function Guide
6-4-1 Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
■ Description
The Ethernet Unit's socket services are used by setting parameters and
manipulating bits only.
■ Point
This method is used by setting the required parameters in the socket service
parameter area allocated in the CPU Bus Unit words in the DM Area, and then
turning ON the Socket Service Request Switches in memory.
■ Advantages/Disadvantages
A total of eight ports (UDP and TCP combined) can be used for socket ser-
vices.
6-4-2 Executing CMND(490)
■ Description
The socket services are used by sending service request commands to the
Ethernet Unit.
■ Point
A UDP or TCP socket service is requested by sending a FINS command to
the Ethernet Unit by executing CMND(490) from the CPU Unit.
■ Advantages/Disadvantages
• Knowledge of FINS commands is required.
• The previous user program can be used without changing because the
functions are equivalent to those of CVM1/CV-series Ethernet Units.
• A total of 16 sockets, comprising eight TCP ports and eight UDP ports,
can be used.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Service Functions
Section 6-5
6-5 Using Socket Service Functions
6-5-1 Procedure
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
↓
2. Use the CX-Programmer or Programming Console to make the socket service settings in the
socket service parameter areas 1 to 8 (m+18 to m+88) allocated in the DM Area.
Note: The first word m in the allocated DM Area = D30000 + (100 × unit number)
↓
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the Options Menu, and then click the Yes Button. The Setup data
in the allocated DM Area will be transferred to the CPU Unit.
↓
4. Use one of the following methods to request socket services.
Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Turn each of the Socket Service Request Switches 1 to 8 in the CIO Area from OFF to ON.
Executing the CMND(490) Instruction
Send each of the socket service requests in FINS commands addressed to the Ethernet Unit.
6-5-2 Settings Required for Socket Service Function
The following settings must be made in the Unit Setup when using socket ser-
vices.
CX-Programmer
Unit Setup Tab
Setting
Setting requirements
Page
Setup
Broadcast
Required.
108
IP Address
Optional
Optional
Sub-net Mask
IP Router Table
Optional (Set when Ethernet
Unit will communicate through
the IP router with a socket on
another IP network segment)
TCP/IP keep-alive
Optional (Change when the
default setting of 120 min is
unacceptable.)
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Service Functions
Section 6-5
6-5-3 Setup Tab
The CPU Bus Unit System Setup, which is set when using socket services, is
shown in the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup Window.
.
■ Setup
Item
Broadcast
Details
Default value
Set the method for specifying IP address All 1 (4.3BSD)
when broadcasting with FINS/UDP.
• All 1 (4.3BSD): Broadcast with host
number set to all ones.
• All 0 (4.2BSD): Broadcast with host
number set to all zeros.
For normal operations use the default:
All 1 (4.3BSD)
IP Address
Set local IP address for Ethernet Unit.
0.0.0.0 (Uses
192.168.250.FINS
node address)
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet Unit. 0.0.0.0
This setting is required when the IP
(Uses default net-
Address Table method is not used for IP mask of IP
address conversion.
address setting.)
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Service Functions
Section 6-5
Item
Details
Default value
IP Router Table
Set when the Ethernet Unit will communi- None
cate with nodes in other IP network seg-
ments via an IP router.
TCP/IP keep-alive Set the liveness checking interval (keep-
alive). When using FINS/TCP or TCP/IP
socket services, if the remote node
0
(120 min)
(server or client) continues idling (no
response) for the duration of time set
here or longer, the connection will be
closed. (only when using FINS/TCP or
TCP/IP socket services).
Setting range: 0 to 65535 min
The keep-alive setting (remote node live-
ness checking enabled/disabled) is
shared by each connection number set in
the FINS/TCP Tab.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Socket Service Status
Section 6-6
6-6 Socket Service Status
6-6-1 CIO Area Allocations
The following CIO Area words are allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the
CIO Area starting at word n+ 1. The value of n can be calculated from the unit
number as follows:
Beginning word n = CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number)
■ UDP/TCP Socket Status (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
The status of the UDP and TCP sockets is provided in the socket status words
shown in the following diagram. There is a status word for each socket for both
UDP and TCP.
15
8
7
0
n+1
UDP Socket No. 1 Status
UDP Socket No. 2 Status
UDP Socket No. 3 Status
UDP Socket No. 4 Status
UDP Socket No. 5 Status
UDP Socket No. 6 Status
UDP Socket No. 7 Status
UDP Socket No. 8 Status
TCP Socket No. 1 Status
TCP Socket No. 2 Status
TCP Socket No. 3 Status
TCP Socket No. 4 Status
TCP Socket No. 5 Status
TCP Socket No. 6 Status
TCP Socket No. 7 Status
TCP Socket No. 8 Status
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
n+6
n+7
n+8
n+9
n+10
n+11
n+12
n+13
n+14
n+15
n+16
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Socket Service Status
Section 6-6
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
-
8
-
7
-
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
Data Received/Requested Flag
Results Storage Flag
Opening Flag
Receiving Flag
Sending Flag
Closing Flag
TCP Connection/UDP Open Flag
Bit
Switch
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
Turns ON when an open request is received.
0
Opening Flag
ON
Unit
OFF
ON
Turns OFF when open processing has been completed.
Turns ON when a receive request is received.
1
2
3
Receiving Flag
Sending Flag
Closing Flag
OFF
ON
Turns OFF when receive processing has been completed.
Turns ON when a send request is received.
OFF
ON
Turns OFF when send processing has been completed.
Turns ON when an close request is received.
OFF
ON
Turns OFF when close processing has been completed.
13 Data Received Flag
Turns ON when data from a remote node has been received at an
open TCP socket.
OFF
Turns OFF when receive processing has been requested for an
open TCP socket.
14 Results Storage Error ON
Flag
Turns ON if there is an error in the Results Storage Area specified
for the socket service request command to the Ethernet Unit.
This flag turns ON at the same time as any of the services request
processing flags (bits 0 to 3) turn ON again (i.e, at completion of
processing).
OFF
Turns OFF when the next request is received.
15 TCPConnection/UDP ON
Open Flag
Turns ON when UDP open processing has been completed or when
a TCP connection is made.
OFF
Turns OFF when close processing has been completed. (Will
remain OFF when open processing ends in an error.)
6-6-2 DM Area Allocations
The following DM Area words are allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the
DM Area. The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation.
Beginning word m = D30000 + (100 x unit number)
■ Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
The number of bytes of data saved in the reception buffer at the TCP socket is
stored in the TCP Connection Status words. The Data Received Flag in the
CIO Area turns ON/OFF in response to the status of these words. When the
dedicated control bits (switches) are manipulated or the receive request is
sent by executing the CMND(490) instruction, the values of these words are
temporarily set to 0000 hexadecimal.
If any data remains in the reception buffer after the receive request processing
is complete, the number of bytes is stored in the Number of Bytes Received at
TCP Socket and the Data Received Flag turns ON again.
Receive requests should be executed after confirming that the required data
is contained in the number of bytes received.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m+1 to m+8
Number of Bytes Received (0000 to 07C0 hexadecimal)
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Up to 4,096 bytes of data are stored in the reception buffer, but the value
stored is within the range (maximum: 1,984 bytes) that can be set by manipu-
lating the control bits or sending the receive request in the CMND(490)
instruction.
0000 hexadecimal: 0 bytes
07C0 hexadecimal: 1,984 bytes
■ TCP Connection Status (Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit)
The TCP Connection Status shows the status of a port that has been opened
using the TCP socket. This port status is stored even after the port is closed,
and remains until the socket is used to open the port again.
The TCP Connection Status Bits are not synchronized with the Socket Status
words, however, so the status conversion timing is slightly different.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m+9 to m+16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TCP connection status
The status is shown in bits 0 to 3 (1-digit hexadecimal), as follows:
Number Status Meaning
00000000 CLOSED
Connection closed.
00000001 LISTEN
Waiting for connection.
00000002 SYN SENT
00000003 SYN RECEIVED
00000004 ESTABLISHED
00000005 CLOSE WAIT
00000006 FIN WAIT1
00000007 CLOSING
00000008 LAST ACK
00000009 FIN WAIT2
0000000A TIME WAIT
SYN sent in active status.
SYN received and sent.
Already established.
FIN received and waiting for completion.
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
After closing, pauses twice the maximum seg-
ment life (2MSL).
6-7 Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control
Bits
6-7-1 Application Procedure
Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Set the socket service parameters in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Ar-
ea.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
m = D30000 + (100 x unit number)
CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area
Parameters
Socket option
UDP/TCP socket No.
15
0
m+18
m+28
Local UDP/TCP port No.
Remote IP address
Socket Service Parameter Area 1
Socket Service Parameter Area 2
Remote UDP/TCP port No.
Number of bytes to send/receive
Send/Receive data address
m+88
Time out time
Socket Service Parameter Area 8
Response code
2. Turn ON the Socket Service Request Switches in the CPU Bus Unit Area
in the CIO Area.
CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area
Socket Service
Request Switches 2
Socket Service
Request Switches 1
Close Request
Switch
UDP Open Request Switch
TCP Passive Open Request Switch
Receive Request Switch
Socket Service
Request Switches 8
Socket Service
Request Switches 7
Send Request Switch
TCP Active Open Request Switch
3. When a send or receive request is made, the data will be automatically
sent or received according to the send/receive data address in the Socket
Service Parameter Area. When processing has been completed, a re-
sponse code will be automatically stored in the Socket Service Parame-
ters.
Number of bytes to send/receive
Send/receive data address
I/O memory
Send
or
Receive
Response code
Stored
Precautions
A Socket Service Parameter Area cannot be used for other sockets once
open processing has been successfully completed for it. Check the socket
status before attempting to open a socket. TCP socket status is provided in
words m+9 to m+16 in the DM Area for sockets 1 to 8.
6-7-2 Socket Services and Socket Status
When using socket services, it is important to consider the timing of the status
changes in the Socket Status Area. The diagram below shows a flowchart for
opening UDP.The flow is similar for other socket services. Replace the names
of the appropriate flags in the flowchart to adapt it to other socket services.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Start UDP Open.
Program Flow
Error Evaluation
Check TCP Connection/UDP Open Flag.
OFF?
YES
The specified UDP socket is
already open.
NO
Is Bit 15 (Open Flag) in the socket status word for
the socket being used OFF?
(Checks to see if the socket is open before com-
munications and close processing.)
Turn ON UDP Open Request Switch.
This Socket Service Request Switch is used to request
opening of a UDP socket to the Ethernet Unit.
Confirm end of processing.
ON/OFF?
OFF
This Socket Service Request Switch that was turned
ON will be turned OFF by the Ethernet Unit when
processing has been completed.
An error occurred. The specified
socket could not be opened.
Check response code.
0000?
YES
NO
Is the response code 0000, indicating a normal end?
UDP socket opened.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
6-7-3 Socket Service Parameters
The Socket Service Parameter Areas in which parameters are set to request
socket services are in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the DM Area of the CPU Unit.
The Socket Service Parameter Areas are allocated as shown in the following
diagrams. The first word of in the DM Area allocated to the Ethernet Unit as a
CPU Bus Unit is referred to as “m” and is calculated as follows:
m = D30000 + (100 × unit number)
m+18
Socket Service Parameter Area 1
m+27
m+28
Socket Service Parameter Area 2
m+37
m+88
Socket Service Parameter Area 8
m+97
The configuration of each of the Socket Service Parameter Areas is shown in
the following diagram.
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10
Socket option
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
UDP/TCP socket number
Local UDP/TCP port number (0000 to FFFF Hex)
Remote IP address (00000000 to FFFFFFFF Hex)
Remote UDP/TCP port number (0000 to FFFF Hex)
+5
+6
+7
Number of bytes to send/receive (0000 to 07C0 Hex)
Send/receive data address
+8
+9
Timeout value (0000 to FFFF Hex)
Response code
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Parameter Settings
The following table shows the parameters that are required for each service
and the use of the parameters by the socket service.
UDP Socket Services
Parameter
No. of
words
Range
(decimal values in
parentheses)
Socket service
UDP
open
UDP
UDP
send
UDP
close
receive
Socket option
1
Specified bit
---
---
---
---
UDP/TCP socket No.
0001 to 0008 hexadecimal
(1 to 8)
W
W
---
W
---
R
W
---
W
W
---
---
Local UDP/TCP port No.
Remote IP address
1
2
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
hexadecimal
(0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)
Remote UDP/TCP port No.
1
1
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
---
---
R
W
---
---
Number of bytes to send/receive
0000 to 07C0 hexadecimal
(0 to 1,984 bytes)
RW
RW
Send/Receive data address
Time out time
2
1
Memory area address
---
---
W
W
W
---
---
---
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
(0: No limit, 0.1 to 6,553.5 s)
(Unit: 100 ms)
Response code
1
---
R
R
R
R
Note W:
RW: Written by user at execution and then read for results at completion
R: Read by user for results at completion
---: Not used.
Written by user
TCP Socket Services
Parameter
No. of
words
Range
(decimal values in
parentheses)
Socket service
TCP
passive active receive
open open
TCP
TCP
TCP
send
TCP
close
Socket option
1
Specified bit
W
W
---
W
---
---
UDP/TCP socket No.
0001 to 0008 hexadecimal
(1 to 8)
W
W
W
---
---
W
---
---
Local UDP/TCP port No.
Remote IP address
1
2
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
W
RW
W
---
---
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
hexadecimal
RW
(0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Remote UDP/TCP port
No.
1
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
RW
---
W
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Number of bytes to send/ 1
receive
0000 to 07C0 hexadecimal
(0 to 1,984 bytes)
RW
W
RW
W
Send/Receive data
address
2
Memory area address
---
Time out time
(Unit: 100 ms)
1
0000 to FFFF hexadecimal
(0 to 65,535)
(0: No limit, 0.1 to 6,553.5 s)
W
W
---
Response code
1
---
R
R
R
R
R
Note W:
Written by user
RW: Written by user at execution and then read for results at completion
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
R:
Read by user for results at completion
---: Not used.
6-7-4 Parameters
■ Socket Option
For the TCP OPEN REQUEST (ACTIVE or PASSIVE) command, specifies
whether or not the keep-alive function is to be used. When the keep-alive
function is used, bit 8 is ON (set to 1).
■ UDP/TCP Socket No.
Specify the number of the UDP or TCP socket to open.
■ Local UDP/TCP Port No.
Specify the number of the UDP or TCP port for the socket to use for
communications.
• Do not specify the port being used as the FINS UDP port (default: 9600)
in an open request for a UDP socket.
• Do not specify FTP server TCP port numbers 20 and 21 in an open
request for a TCP port.
• Do not specify mail communications TCP port number 25.
• As a rule, use port numbers 1,024 and higher.
If port number 0 is specified when for an active TCP open, the TCP port
number will be automatically allocated and the number of the port that was
opened will be stored in the local UDP/TCP port number in the Socket Service
Parameter Area (i.e., the actual port number will be overwritten on the value of
0 set by the user).
■ Remote IP Address
Specify the IP address of the remote device.
• Offset +2 in the Socket Service Parameter Area contains the upper bytes
of the Remote IP Address, and offset +3 contains the lower bytes.
Example: The contents of offsets +2 and +3 would be as shown below
when the Remote IP Address is 196.36.32.55 (C4.24.20.37 hexadeci-
mal).
+2: C424
+3: 2037
• This parameter is not used when making a receive request for a UDP
socket. The remote IP address will be stored with the response data and
will be written as the Remote IP Address in the Socket Service Parameter
Area.
• When opening a passive TCP socket, the combination of the remote IP
address and the remote TCP port number can be used to affect process-
ing as shown in the following table.
Remote IP
Address
Remote TCP
Port No.
Processing
0
0
0
All connection requests accepted.
Not 0
Connection requests accepted only for the same
port number.
Not 0
Not 0
0
Connection requests accepted only for the same IP
address.
Not 0
Connection requests accepted only for the same
port number and IP address.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
If the Remote IP Address is set to 0, a connection can be made to any remote
node and the remote IP address of the node that is connected will be stored
as the Remote IP Address in the Socket Service Parameter Area. If a specific
remote I/O address is set, then a connection can be made only to the node
with the specified address.
If the Remote TCP Port No. is set to 0, a connection can be made to any
remote node regardless of the TCP port number it is using. If a specific
remote TCP port number is set, then a connection can be made only to a
node using the specified TCP port number.
■ Remote UDP/TCP Port No.
Specify the UDP or TCP port number used by the remote device.
• This parameter is not used when making a receive request for a UDP
socket. The remote UDP/TCP port number will be stored with the
response data and will be written as the Remote UDP/TCP Port No. in the
Socket Service Parameter Area.
• When opening a passive TCP socket, the combination of the remote IP
address and the remote TCP port number can be used to affect process-
ing as shown in the table for the Remote IP Address, above. If the Remote
UDP/TCP Port No. is set to 0, the UDP/TCP port number of the remote
device will be written as the Remote UDP/TCP Port No. in the Socket Ser-
vice Parameter Area.
■ Time Out Time
Set the time limit in units of 0.1 s for completion of communications from the
time that the Receive Request Switch (TCP or UDP) or the TCP Passive
Open Request Switch is turned ON. A response code of 0080 hexadecimal
(timeout) will be stored if communications time out. If 0 is set, the requested
service will not be timed.
■ Number of Bytes to Send/Receive
Send the number of bytes to be sent or the number of bytes to receive. When
the transfer has been completed, the actual number of bytes that have been
sent or received will be written here.
■ Send/Receive Data Address
Specify the address of the first word to send or the address of the first word
where data is to be received. Always set the bit number to 00 hexadecimal.
Offset
15
8
7
0
+6
Area
designation
Leftmost 2 digits
of word address
Rightmost 2 digits
of word address
Bit number
(always 00 Hex)
+7
The following specifications can be used.
Area Word address
Area
Word address
designation (hexadecimal)
(hexadecimal)
CIO, HR,
and AR
Areas
CIO
HR
0000 to 6143
B0
B2
B3
82
0000 to 17FF
0000 to 01FF
01C0 to 03BF
0000 to 7FFF
0000 to 7FFF
:
H000 to H511
AR
A448 to A959
DM Area
EM Area
DM
D00000 to D32767
Bank 0
:
E0_00000 to E0_32767 A0
:
:
Bank C
EC_00000 to EC_32767 AC
0000 to 7FFF
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches
Dedicated control bits can be manipulated to request socket services. These
bits are called Socket Service Request Switches, and are turned ON in the
CPU Unit to request socket services through the Ethernet Unit.
The Socket Service Request Switches are allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area
in the CIO Area starting at the word n + 19. The value of n can be calculated
from the unit number as follows:
n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
Offset
15
8
7
0
n+19 Socket Service
Request Switches 2
Socket Service
Request Switches 1
Socket Service
n+20
Socket Service
Request Switches 3
Request Switches 4
Socket Service
n+21
Socket Service
Request Switches 5
Request Switches 6
Socket Service
n+22
Socket Service
Request Switches 7
Request Switches 8
The configuration of each set of Socket Service Request Switches is shown in
the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
1
8
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
UDP Open Request Switch
TCP Passive Open Request Switch
TCP Active Open Request Switch
Send Request Switch
Receive Request Switch
Close Request Switch
Bit
Switch
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
8
0
UDP Open Request ON
Switch
User
Unit
UDP socket opened when switch is turned ON.
OFF
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been com-
pleted (i.e., when a connection has been made).
9
1
2
3
TCP Passive Open ON
Request Switch
User
Unit
Passive TCP socket opened when switch is turned ON.
OFF
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been com-
pleted (i.e., when a connection has been made).
10
11
TCP Active Open
Request Switch
ON
User
Unit
Active TCP socket opened when switch is turned ON.
OFF
ON
Unit turns OFF switch when open processing has been com-
pleted (i.e., when a connection has been made).
Send Request
Switch
User
Send processing executed when switch is turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when the socket is
opened.)
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when send processing has been com-
pleted.
12
4
Receive Request
Switch
User
Receive processing executed when switch is turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when the socket is
opened.)
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when receive processing has been com-
pleted.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Bit
Switch
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
13
5
Close Request
Switch
ON
User
Close processing executed when switch is turned ON.
(The protocol (TCP/UDP) is determined when the socket is
opened.)
OFF
Unit
Unit turns OFF switch when close processing has been com-
pleted.
As shown in the above table, the Request Switches are turned OFF by the
Ethernet Unit when the requested processes has been completed.
Note There is also a Socket Force-close Switch in bit 2 of the first word allocated to
the Ethernet Unit in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area. When the Socket
Force-close Switch is turned ON, all sockets that are open will be force-
closed. Refer to Section 4 Ethernet Unit Memory Allocations in the Operation
Manual, Construction of Networks for details.
When using socket services with the Socket Service Request Switches, the
ladder diagram should be programmed to check the response codes when
Socket Service Request Switches are turned OFF.
6-7-6 Response Codes
When processing of a request has been completed for socket services exe-
cuted using Socket Service Request Switches, a response code will be stored
in the Response Code word in the Socket Service Parameter Area. The fol-
lowing response codes will be stored depending on the service that was
requested.
UDP Socket Open Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0105
0302
1100
110C
220F
2211
2606
Local IP address setting error.
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
UDP socket number is not 1 to 8 or local UDP port number is 0.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already open.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified socket is already open as TCP socket; cannot open UDP
socket.
2607
003E
0049
0081
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
The same UDP port number has been specified more than once
(EADDRINUSE).
The specified socket was closed during open processing.
UDP Socket Receive Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0302
1100
1101
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
Number of bytes to receive is not in allowable range.
The area designation of the Send/Receive Data Address is not in
allowable range.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Response
code
Meaning
1103
110C
220F
2210
2211
2607
The bit number in the Send/Receive Data Address is not 00.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already processing a receive request.
The specified socket is not open.
Unit is busy; cannot execute service.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
003E
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
0066
0080
0081
Internal memory cannot be obtained; cannot execute service.
Receive request timed out.
The specified socket was closed during reception processing.
UDP Socket Send Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0302
1100
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
Number of bytes to send is not in allowable range or the remote IP
address is 0.
1101
The area designation of the Send/Receive Data Address is not in
allowable range.
1103
110C
220F
2210
2211
2607
The bit number in the Send/Receive Data Address is not 00.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already processing a send request.
The specified socket is not open.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
003E
0042
004C
004E
0051
0081
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
The remote IP address is a broadcast address and the number of
bytes to send is greater than 1,472 bytes (EMSGSIZE).
The network ID is incorrect or the remote IP address is incorrect
(EADDRNOTAVAIL)
The network ID is not in the IP router table, router settings are incor-
rect, or the remote IP address is incorrect (ENETUNREACH).
The router settings are incorrect or the remote IP address is incor-
rect (EHOSTUNREACH).
The specified socket was closed during send processing.
UDP Socket Close Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0302
2210
2211
2607
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
The specified socket is not open.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
TCP Socket Passive Open Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
0105
0302
1100
110C
220F
Normal end
Local IP address setting error.
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
TCP socket number is not 1 to 8 or local TCP port number is 0.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already open or already processing an open
request.
2211
2606
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified socket is already open as UDP socket; cannot open TCP
socket.
2607
003E
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
0042
An error occurred. (EMSGSIZE).
(See note.)
0045
0049
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNABORTED).
The same TCP port number has been specified more than once
(EADDRINUSE).
004A
Error (ECONNREFUSED).
(See note.)
004B
(See note.)
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNRESET).
Remote IP address parameter error (ENETUNREACH).
Remote IP address parameter error (EHOSTUNREACH).
004E
(See note.)
0051
(See note.)
0053
Error in communications with remote node (ETIMEDOUT) or remote
node does not exist.
0066
0080
0081
0082
Internal memory cannot be obtained; cannot execute.
Open request timed out.
The specified socket was closed during open processing.
Connection could not be established with specified remote node.
Note These response codes will be returned only on large, multilevel networks.
TCP Socket Active Open Request
Response
Meaning
code
0000
Normal end
0105
0302
1100
110C
220F
Local IP address setting error.
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
TCP socket number is not 1 to 8 or local TCP port number is 0.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already open or already processing an open
request.
2211
2606
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified socket is already open as UDP socket; cannot open TCP
socket.
2607
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Response
code
Meaning
Remote IP address parameter error (EACCES).
000D
003E
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
0042
Error (EMSGSIZE).
(See note.)
0044
0045
0049
ICMP data received (ENOPROTOOPT).
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNABORTED).
The same port number has been specified more than once (EAD-
DRINUSE).
004A
Error (ECONNREFUSED) or the remote node has not been opened
as passive socket.
004B
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNRESET).
(See note.)
004C
Remote IP address parameter error (EADDRNOTAVAIL).
Wrong parameter designation.
An attempt was made to set the local TCP port of the local node to
Active Open.
004E
Remote IP address parameter error (ENETUNREACH).
The network ID is not in the IP router table or router settings are
incorrect.
0051
0053
0081
Remote IP address parameter error (EHOSTUNREACH).
The router settings are incorrect.
Communications error with remote node (ETIMEDOUT).
No remote node.
The specified socket was closed during open processing.
Note These response codes will be returned only on large, multilevel networks.
TCP Socket Receive Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0302
1100
1101
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
Number of receive bytes not in allowable range.
The area designation of the Send/Receive Data Address is not in
allowable range.
1103
110C
220F
2210
2211
2607
The bit number in the Send/Receive Data Address is not 00.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already processing a receive request.
Specified socket has not been connected.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
003E
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
0042
ICMP data received (EMSGSIZE).
(See note.)
0044
ICMP data received (ENOPROTOOPT).
(See note.)
0045
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNABORTED).
(See note.)
004B
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNRESET).
ICMP data received (ENETUNREACH).
004E
(See note.)
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Response
code
Meaning
004F
ICMP data received (EHOSTDOWN).
(See note.)
0051
ICMP data received (EHOSTUNREACH).
(See note.)
0053
0066
0080
0081
Error in communications with remote host (ETIMEDOUT).
Internal memory cannot be obtained; cannot execute.
Receive request timed out.
The specified socket was closed during receive processing.
Note These response codes will be returned only on large, multilevel networks.
TCP Socket Send Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
Normal end
0302
1100
1101
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
Number of bytes to send not in allowable range.
The area designation of the Send/Receive Data Address is not in
allowable range.
1103
110C
220F
2210
2211
2607
The bit number in the Send/Receive Data Address is not 00.
Request Switch turned ON during other processing.
Specified socket is already processing a send request.
The specified socket is not been connected.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
0020
003E
Connection with remote socket broken during send (EPIPE).
Internal buffer cannot be obtained due to high reception traffic
(ENOBUFS).
0042
(See note.)
The remote IP address is a broadcast address and the number of
bytes to send is greater than 1,472 bytes (EMSGSIZE).
0044
ICMP data received (ENOPROTOOPT).
(See note.)
0045
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNABORTED).
(See note.)
004A
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNREFUSED).
Error in communications with remote node (ECONNRESET).
004B
(See note.)
004E
(See note.)
Remote IP address parameter error (ENETUNREACH).
ICMP data received (EHOSTDOWN).
004F
(See note.)
0051
(See note.)
Remote IP address parameter error (EHOSTUNREACH).
Error in communications with remote node (ETIMEDOUT).
The specified socket was closed during send processing.
0053
(See note.)
0081
Note These response codes will be returned only on large, multilevel networks.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
TCP Socket Close Request
Response
code
Meaning
0000
0302
2210
2211
2607
Normal end
CPU Unit error; cannot execute.
The specified socket is not been connected.
Unit is busy; cannot execute.
Specified Socket Service Parameter Area is already being used for
another socket.
6-7-7 Timing Charts
The timing of flags for socket services (Opening, Receiving, Sending, or Clos-
ing Flag) when the Request Switches are used and the changes in the
response code are shown in the following chart.
Request
Switch
Response
Response code stored
code
Flag
Request Switch Request
Not synced with
turned ON.
accepted.
Request Switch.
Closing during Other
Processes
The Close Request Switch or Force-close Switch can be used to close a
socket even when open, receive, or send processing is being executed. Clos-
ing is the only other process that is possible during other processes.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Close Request Switch
The processing results are stored as the response code when the Close
Request Switch is used. There will always be one PLC cycle time between
turning OFF the Request Switch for the canceled process and turning of the
Close Request Switch, allowing time for the response code to be read.
At least one PC cycle time be-
tween response codes
Open, Send, or Receive
Request Switch
Close Request Switch
Response Code
Response code stored.
Response code stored.
Opening, Sending, or
Receiving Flag
Closing Flag
Open Flag
Request Switch Request
turned ON.
accepted.
Close request
accepted.
Not synced with
Request Switches.
Close Request
Switch turned ON.
Note The Open Flag will not turn ON at all if a close request is made during open
processing.
Force-close Switch
The requested processes are canceled and an response code is stored when
the Force-close Switch is used.
Open, Send, or Receive
Request Switch
Force-close Switch
Response code stored.
Response Code
Opening, Sending, or
Receiving Flag
Closing Flag
Open Flag
Request
accepted.
Request Switch
turned ON.
Close request
accepted.
Force-close
Switch turned ON.
Not synced with
Request Switches.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Note The Open Flag will not turn ON at all if a force-close request is made during
open processing.
6-7-8 TCP/IP Communications Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates transferring 100 bytes of data
between an Ethernet Unit and a host computer using TCP/IP communica-
tions.
System Configuration
The programming example uses the following system configuration. For the
TCP connection, the Ethernet Unit uses a passive open and the host com-
puter uses an active open.
Host computer
Ethernet Unit
PLC
IP address:
196.36.32.55
IP address:
196.36.32.101
Port number: 4096
Port number: 4096
Data Flow
The data will flow between the CPU Unit, Ethernet Unit, and host computer as
shown in the following diagram.
Line
(Ethernet)
Ethernet
Unit
CPU Unit
Host computer
Request Switches and ex-
ecution bits turned ON
(see note).
Sent to line.
Execution bits turned OFF
Processing in
host computer
Note Here, “execution bits” refer to CIO 000000 to CIO 000003, which are used in
the ladder diagram to control execution of communications.
Basic Operations
• CIO 000000 is turned ON to request opening a TCP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000001 is turned ON to request closing the TCP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000002 is turned ON to request sending data from the Ethernet Unit.
Data (100 bytes) is sent beginning at D00000.
• CIO 000003 is turned ON to request receiving data from the Ethernet
• One of the bits between CIO 000100 and CIO 000103 will turn ON if an
error occurs. Refer to 6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches for informa-
tion on errors.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Program Memory Map
The send and receive data and bits (flags) used by the program are shown in
the following diagram.
DM Area
Send data, 100 bytes (100 = 0064 Hex)
Receive data, 100 bytes (100 = 0064 Hex)
CIO Area
15 to 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCP
Send
Bit
TCP
Close
Bit
TCP
TCP
CIO 0000
CIO 0001
CIO 0002
Open
Bit
Receive
Bit
TCP
Send
Error
Flag
TCP
Close
Error
Flag
TCP
Open
Error
Flag
TCP
Receive
Error
Flag
TCP
Opening
Flag
TCP
TCP
TCP
Receiving Sending Closing
Flag
Flag
Flag
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Programming Example
000000
TCP Passive Open
When the TCP Open Bit (CIO 000000) turns ON, the TCP
Open Error Flag (CIO 000100) is turned OFF and the TCP
Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
@RSET
@SET
000100
000200
000000 000200
When the TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) turns ON, the
following parameters are written to the parameter area for
socket number 1.
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30019: 1000 Hex = Local UDP/TCP port No. 4096
D30020 and D30021:
C424 2037 Hex =
Remote IP address 196.36.32.55
D30022: 0000 Hex = Any remote UDP/TCP port No.
D30026: 0000 Hex = No timeout time
MOV(21)
#0001
D30018
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
#1000
D30019
#C424
D30020
#2037
D30021
#0000
D30022
#0000
D30026
000000 000200
SET
After the parameters have been set, the TCP Passive
Open Request Switch (CIO 151901) is turned ON and
the TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned OFF.
151901
000200
RSET
SET
If the TCP Passive Open Request Switch (CIO 151901)
turns OFF while the TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is
OFF, the contents of the response code (D30027) in the
Socket Service Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not
0000 Hex (normal end), the TCP Open Error Flag (CIO
000100) is turned ON.
000000 000200 151901
<>(305)
000100
000000
D30027
#0000
000000 000200 151901
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Open Bit (CIO 000000) is turned OFF.
000001
TCP Close
@RSET
@SET
When the TCP Close Bit (CIO 000001) turns ON, the TCP
Close Error Flag (CIO 000101) is turned OFF and the TCP
Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is turned ON to initialize proces-
sing.
000101
000201
000001 000201
000001 000201
When the TCP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) turns ON, the
following parameter is written to the parameter area for
socket number 1.
MOV(21)
#0001
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30018
After the parameter has been set, the Close Request
Switch (CIO 151905) is turned ON and the TCP Closing
Flag (CIO 000201) is turned OFF.
SET
151905
000201
If the Close Request Switch (CIO 151905) turns OFF while
the TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000201) is OFF, the contents
of the response code (D30027) in the Socket Service
Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000 Hex (normal
end), the TCP Close Error Flag (CIO 000101) is turned ON.
RSET
Continued on next page.
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP Close Bit (CIO 000001) is turned OFF.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Continued from previous page.
000001 000201 151905
TCP Send
SET
<>(305)
When the TCP Send Bit (CIO 000002) turns ON, the TCP
Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned OFF and the TCP
Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
000101
000001
D30027
#0000
000001 000201 151905
RSET
000002
@RSET
@SET
000102
000202
000002 000202
MOV(21)
When the TCP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) turns ON, the
following parameters are written to the parameter area for
socket number 1.
#0001
D30018
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30023: 0064 Hex = No. of send/receive bytes is 100
D30024 and D30025:
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
8200 0000 Hex =
Send/receive data address D00000
#0064
D30023
#8200
D30024
#0000
D30025
000002 000202
SET
151903
000202
After the parameters have been set, the Send Request
Switch (CIO 151903) is turned ON and the TCP Sending
Flag (CIO 000202) is turned OFF.
RSET
If the Send Request Switch (CIO 151903) turns OFF while
the TCP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is OFF, the contents
of the response code (D30027) in the Socket Service Pa-
rameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000 Hex (normal
end), the TCP Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned ON.
000002 000202 151903
000002 000202 151903
@SET
RSET
<>(305)
000102
000002
D30027
#0000
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Send Bit (CIO 000002) is turned OFF.
000003
TCP Receive
@RSET
@SET
When the TCP Receive Bit (CIO 000003) turns ON, the
TCP Receive Error Flag (CIO 000103) is turned OFF and
the TCP Data Received/Requested Flag (CIO 150913), and
the Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket (D30001) are
checked. If the data is stored in the buffer, the TCP
Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON.
000103
000203
150913
=(300)
D30001
&100
Continued on next page.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Continued from previous page.
000003 000203
When the TCP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON,
the following parameters are written to the parameter
area for socket number 1.
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30023: 0064 Hex = No. of send/receive bytes is 100
D30024 and D30025:
8203 E800 Hex =
Send/receive data address D01000
D30026: 0000 Hex = No timeout time.
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
#0001
D30018
#0064
D30023
#8203
D30024
#E800
D30025
#0000
D30026
000003 000203
After the parameter has been set, the Receive Request
Switch (CIO 151904) is turned ON and the TCP Receiv-
ing Flag (CIO 000203) is turned OFF.
SET
151904
000203
RSET
000203 151904
000003
If the Receive Request Switch (CIO 151904) turns OFF
while the TCP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is OFF, the
contents of the response code (D30027) in the Socket
Service Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000
Hex (normal end), the TCP Receive Error Flag (CIO
000103) is turned ON.
SET
<>(305)
000103
000003
D30027
#0000
000003 000203 151904
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Receive Bit (CIO 000003) is turned OFF.
END(01)
Note When using the above programming example, change the bit and word
addresses as necessary to avoid using the same areas used by other parts of
the user program or the CPU Bus Unit.
6-7-9 UDP/IP Communications Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates transferring 100 bytes of data
between an Ethernet Unit and a host computer using UDP/IP communica-
tions.
System Configuration
The programming example uses the following system configuration.
Host computer
Ethernet Unit
PLC
IP address: 196.36.32.55
Port number: 4096
IP address: 196.36.32.101
Port number: 4096
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Basic Operations
• CIO 000000 is turned ON to request opening a UDP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000001 is turned ON to request closing the UDP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000002 is turned ON to request sending data from the Ethernet Unit.
The data is sent (100 bytes) beginning from word D00000.
• CIO 000003 is turned ON to request receiving data from the Ethernet
• One of the bits between CIO 000100 and CIO 000103 will turn ON if an
error occurs. Refer to 6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches for informa-
tion on errors.
Program Memory Map
The send and receive data and bits (flags) used by the program are shown in
the following diagram.
DM Area
Send data, 100 bytes (100 = 0064 Hex)
Receive data, 100 bytes (100 = 0064 Hex)
CIO Area
15 to 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
Send
Bit
UDP
Close
Bit
UDP
Open
Bit
UDP
Receive
Bit
CIO 0000
CIO 0001
CIO 0002
UDP
Send
Error
Flag
UDP
Close
Error
Flag
UDP
Open
Error
Flag
UDP
Receive
Error
Flag
UDP
Opening
Flag
UDP
UDP
UDP
Receiving Sending Closing
Flag
Flag
Flag
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Programming Example
000000
UDP Open
@RSET
When the UDP Open Bit (CIO 000000) turns ON, the UDP
Open Error Flag (CIO 000100) is turned OFF and the UDP
Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
000100
000200
@SET
000000 000200
When the UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) turns ON, the
following parameters are written to the parameter area for
socket number 1.
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30019: 1000 Hex = Local UDP/TCP port No. 4096
MOV(21)
#0001
D30018
MOV(21)
SET
#1000
D30019
000000 000200
After the parameters have been set, the UDP Open Re-
quest Switch (CIO 151900) is turned ON and the UDP
Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned OFF.
151900
If the UDP Open Request Switch (CIO 151900) turns
OFF while the UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is OFF,
the contents of the response code (D30027) in the Socket
Service Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000
Hex (normal end), the UDP Open Error Flag (CIO
000100) is turned ON.
RSET
SET
000200
000100
000000 000200 151900
<>(305)
D30027
#0000
000000 000200 151900
000001
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Open Bit (CIO 000000) is turned OFF.
RSET
000000
UDP Close
@RSET
@SET
When the UDP Close Bit (CIO 000001) turns ON, the UDP
Close Error Flag (CIO 000101) is turned OFF and the
UDP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is turned ON to initialize
processing.
000101
000201
When the UDP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) turns ON, the
following parameter is written to the parameter area for
socket number 1.
000001 000201
000001 000201
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
MOV(21)
#0001
After the parameter has been set, the Close Request
Switch (CIO 151905) is turned ON and the UDP Closing
Flag (CIO 000201) is turned OFF.
D30018
SET
If the Close Request Switch (CIO 151905) turns OFF
while the UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000201) is OFF, the
contents of the response code (D30027) in the Socket
Service Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000
Hex (normal end), the UDP Close Error Flag (CIO
000101) is turned ON.
151905
000201
RSET
000001 000201 151905
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Close Bit (CIO 000001) is turned OFF.
SET
<>(305)
000101
000001
D30027
#0000
000001 000201 151905
000002
RSET
@RSET
@SET
UDP Send
When the UDP Send Bit (CIO 000002) turns ON, the UDP
Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned OFF and the UDP
Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
000102
000202
Continued on next page.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Continued from previous page.
000002 000202
MOV(21)
When the UDP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) turns ON, the
following parameters are written to the parameter area for
#0001
D30018 socket number 1.
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30020 and D30021:
C424 2037 Hex =
Remote IP address 196.36.32.55
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
#C424
D30020 D30022: 1000 Hex = Remote UDP/TCP port No. 4096
D30023: 0064 Hex = No. of send/receive bytes is 100
D30024 and D30025:
8200 0000 Hex =
Send/receive data address D00000
#2037
D30021
#1000
D30022
#0064
D30023
#8200
D30024
#0000
D30025
000002 000202
After the parameters have been set, the Send Request
SET
Switch (CIO 151903) is turned ON and the UDP Sending
Flag (CIO 000202) is turned OFF.
151903
000202
RSET
000002 000202 151903
If the Send Request Switch (CIO 151903) turns OFF while
the UDP Sending Flag (CIO 000200) is OFF, the contents
of the response code (D30027) in the Socket Service Pa-
rameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000 Hex (normal
end), the UDP Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned ON.
SET
<>(305)
000102
000002
D30027
#0000
000002 000202 151903
000003
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Send Bit (CIO 000002) is turned OFF.
UDP Receive
@RSET
@SET
When the UDP Receive Bit (CIO 000003) turns ON, the
UDP Receive Error Flag (CIO 000103) is turned OFF and
the UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is turned ON to
initialize processing.
000103
000203
Continued on next page.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
Section 6-7
Continued from previous page.
000003 000203
When the UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON,
the following parameters are written to the parameter area
for socket number 1.
D30018: 0001 Hex = UDP/TCP socket No. 1
D30023: 0064 Hex = No. of send/receive bytes is 100
D30024 and D30025:
8203 E800 Hex =
Send/receive data address D01000
D30026: 0000 Hex = No timeout time.
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
MOV(21)
#0001
D30018
#0064
D30023
#8203
D30024
#E800
D30025
#0000
D30026
000003 000203
SET
After the parameter has been set, the Receive Request
Switch (CIO 151904) is turned ON and the UDP Receiv-
ing Flag (CIO 000203) is turned OFF.
151904
000203
RSET
000203 151904
000003
If the Receive Request Switch (CIO 151904) turns OFF
while the UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is OFF, the
contents of the response code (D30027) in the Socket
Service Parameter Area is checked, and if it is not 0000
Hex (normal end), the UDP Receive Error Flag (CIO
000103) is turned ON.
SET
<>(305)
000103
000003
D30027
#0000
000003 000203 151904
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Receive Bit (CIO 000003) is turned OFF.
END(01)
Note When using the above programming example, change the bit and word
addresses as necessary to avoid using the same areas used by other parts of
the user program or the CPU Bus Unit.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
6-8 Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
6-8-1 Using Socket Service
Each Ethernet Unit has eight TCP sockets and eight UDP sockets. Open,
close, send, and receive processes are available for communications with
sockets.
Open
Enables communications on a specified socket. A socket must be opened
before it can be used for socket services. Opening a TCP socket establishes a
connection.
Close
Ends use of the socket. Breaks the connection for a TCP socket.
Send
Sends data from a specified open socket.
Receive
Specifies an open socket and receives data from that socket.
These processes are carried out by sending FINS commands to the Ethernet
Unit. The process from sending a request for processing to completion is
shown in the following illustrations.
1,2,3...
1. Execute a socket service request command (MRC: 27) for the Ethernet
Unit using CMND(490).
CPU
Ethernet Unit
User program
Socket service
CMND
Request
command
END
2. CMND(490) ends normally when the socket service request command is
received and a response is returned (response code: 0000).
CPU
Ethernet Unit
User program
Response
CMND
END
3. The Ethernet Unit starts the process requested by the parameters in the
socket service request command.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
CPU
Ethernet Unit
Other node
Communications
4. When the process has been completed, the result is stored in the results
storage area defined in the socket service request command and the sock-
et status will indicate completion of processing.
CPU
Ethernet Unit
Socket status area
Process complete
notification
Results storage area
Results stored
6-8-2 Socket Services and Socket Status
When using socket services, it is important to consider the timing of the status
changes in the socket status area. The diagram below shows a program flow-
chart for opening UDP.
Program flow is similar for other socket services. Replace the names of the
appropriate flags in the flowchart to adapt it to other socket services.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Start UDP Open
Program Flow
Error Evaluation
Check socket status.
OFF?
YES
The specified UDP socket is
NO
NO
already open.
Is Bit 15 (Open Flag) in the socket status word for
the socket being used OFF?
(Checks to see if the socket is open before com-
munications and close processing.)
Check the Port Enabled Flag.
ON?
YES
The specified port is running
network communications.
Is the Port Enabled Flag in A502 for communica-
tions port ON?
Execute FINS command (via CMND(490)) for Ethernet Unit.
Use the CMND(490) to send the UDP OPEN RE-
QUEST command (2701) to the Ethernet Unit.
An error occurred. The Ethernet
Unit did not receive the UDP
OPEN REQUEST command.
0000?
YES
Check response.
NO
Is the response code = 0000 (normal) for the
UDP OPEN REQUEST command?
(Socket status bit 00)
Check Opening Flag status.
ON/OFF
Wait until bit 00 in the socket status turns OFF
(open complete).
An error occurred. The specified
socket could not be opened.
Check results storage area response code.
Is response code = 0000?
0000?
YES
NO
UDP opened
6-8-3 Basic FINS Command Format
The basic format for FINS commands used for socket services is shown in the
following diagram.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
Byte order from the
beginning of the frame
Results storage area
Parameters
Command
code
Socket number
Socket option
Command Code:
Specifies the process code requested from the socket.
Socket Option
For the TCP OPEN REQUEST (ACTIVE or PASSIVE) command, specifies
whether or not the keep-alive function is to be used.
Socket Number
Specifies the socket number for the process, between 1 and 8.
Results Storage Area
Specifies the area to store the results of the requested process.
Parameters
Specifies the parameters defined for the command code.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Note If there is more than one Communications Unit mounted to the PLC, the FINS
network address must be set as a parameter for CMND(490) and a local net-
work table must be created in the routing tables from the CX-Programmer.
6-8-4 Response Codes in the Command Response
A response code is returned in the command response as a 2-byte code that
indicates the results of command execution. The response code is returned
just after the command code in the response. The first byte of the response
code provides the overall result of command execution and is called the main
response code (MRES). The second byte provides details and is called the
sub-response code (SRES).
6-8-5 Response Codes in the Results Storage Areas
The response code stored in the Results Storage Area is a 2-byte code that
indicates the processing results of the socket service requested by the com-
mand. This response code is stored in the Results Storage Area when pro-
cessing has been completed.
6-8-6 Communications Timing Chart
The timing of the status changes of the bits in the socket status area and the
Port Enabled Flag is shown in the following diagram.
1
0
Port Enabled Flag
1
0
Opening Flag (bit 0)
1
Receiving Flag (bit 1) 0
1
Sending Flag (bit 2)
Closing Flag (bit 3)
Open Flag (bit 15)
0
1
0
1
0
Open request
received
Receive request
received
Send request
received
Close request
received
Open complete
Receive
complete
Send complete
Close complete
6-8-7 Socket Service Timing Chart
The timing of the socket service open, send, receive, and close request com-
mands are shown in the following diagrams.
■ OPEN REQUEST
1
0
Running
Running
Port Enabled Flag
CMND(490) response code
Open Flag
Error response code
Normal response code
1
0
1
0
Opening Flag
Store normal response code
Results storage area
OPEN REQUEST
command received
OPEN REQUEST
command received
Open complete
(normal end)
Normal
end
Error
end
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
■ CLOSE REQUEST
1
0
Running
Running
Port Enabled Flag
CMND(490) response code
Close Flag
Error response code
Normal response code
1
0
1
0
Closing Flag
Store normal response code
Results storage area
CLOSE REQUEST
command received
CLOSE REQUEST
command received
Close complete
(normal end)
Normal
end
Error
end
■ SEND REQUEST
1
0
Running
Running
Port Enabled Flag
CMND(490) response code
Send Flag
Error response code
Normal response code
1
0
1
0
Opening Flag
Store normal response code
Results storage area
SEND REQUEST
command received
SEND REQUEST
command received
Send complete (normal end)
Error
end
■ RECEIVE REQUEST
1
0
Port Enabled Flag
Running
Running
Error response code
Normal response code
CMND(490) response code
1
0
Receive Flag
Opening Flag
1
0
1
0
Data Received/Requested Flag
0001 to 07CD Hex
0000 Hex
Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket
Results storage area
Store normal response code
RECEIVE REQUEST
command received
RECEIVE REQUEST
command received
Receive complete
(normal end)
Error
end
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
■ CLOSE REQUEST during RECEIVE REQUEST
RECEIVE REQUEST
command received
CLOSE REQUEST
command received
1
0
Running
Running
Port Enabled Flag
CMND(490) (RECEIVE REQUEST)
response command
Normal response code
CMND(490) (CLOSE REQUEST)
response command
Normal response code
1
0
Receive Flag
Close Flag
1
0
1
0
Opening Flag
Results storage area for
RECEIVE REQUEST
Store error response code
Results storage area for
CLOSE REQUEST
Store normal response code
Note The timing shown in the above diagram occurs if a CLOSE REQUEST com-
mand is executed during SEND REQUEST command execution. The timing
shown in the diagram also applies if a CLOSE REQUEST command is exe-
cuted during OPEN REQUEST command execution, with the exception of the
status of the Opening Flag.
6-8-8 TCP/IP Communications Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates transferring 100 bytes of data
between an Ethernet Unit and
communications.
a
host computer using TCP/IP
System Configuration
The system configuration for the program example and the Ethernet Unit
system setup are shown below. To establish a TCP connection, the Ethernet
Unit is passively opened and the host computer actively opened.
Host computer
Ethernet Unit
PLC
IP address:
196.36.32.55
IP address:
196.36.32.101
4096
Port number: 4096
Port number:
FINS network address: 01 Hex
Node address:
Unit number:
01 Hex
10 Hex
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Data Flow
The data will flow between the CPU Unit, Ethernet Unit, and host computer as
shown in the following diagram.
Host
computer
Line
(Ethernet)
Ethernet Unit
CPU Unit
(1) Request Switches
(2) Execution bits turned ON (see Note)
(4) Sent to line.
(3) CMND(490) response
(6) Results stored in results
(7) Execution bits turned OFF
(5) Processing in
host computer
Note Here, “execution bits” refer to CIO 000000 to CIO 000003, which are used in
the ladder diagram to control execution of communications and are not sys-
tem flags, such as the Port Enabled Flags (A20200 to A20207).
Basic Operations
• CIO 000000 is turned ON to request opening a passive TCP socket from
the Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000001 is turned ON to request closing the TCP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000002 is turned ON to request sending data from the Ethernet Unit.
Data (100 bytes) is sent beginning at D02005.
• CIO 000003 is turned ON to request receiving data from the Ethernet
• One of the bits between CIO 000100 and CIO 000103 will turn ON if an
error occurs. Refer to 6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches for informa-
tion on errors. The following areas can be used to access details about
errors:
CMND(490) response codes
Response codes in results storage area
Network Communications Error Flags (A21900 to A21907)
Completion codes (A203 to A210)
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Program Memory Maps
The send and receive data and bits (flags) used by the program are shown in
the following diagrams. The following example shows how the memory maps
are structured.
Legend
Describes the meaning of the data.
0
1
2
D0000
CMND(490) control data
0012H 0004H 0001H
00
Indicates the contents of D00001 is 0004 Hex.
Indicates the contents of D00000 is 0012 Hex.
15 to 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CIO 0000
TCP
Close
Bit
TCP
Open
Bit
Indicates that CIO 000001 is used as the TCP Close Bit.
Indicates that CIO 000000 is used as the TCP Open Bit.
DM Area
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D00000 CMND(490) control data for TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST
0012H 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Response monitor time: 5 s
Port number: Port #0
Remote Ethernet Unit designation
Network address: 01hex
Node address: 01hex
Unit address: 10hex
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST command data bytes: 18 (0012hex) bytes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D00010
CMND(490) control data for TCP CLOSE REQUEST
0008H 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of TCP CLOSE REQUEST command data bytes: 8 bytes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CMND(490) control data for TCP SEND REQUEST
D00020
006EH 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of TCP SEND REQUEST command data bytes: 110 (006E hex) bytes
Command format = 10 bytes + 100 bytes send data
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CMND(490) control data for TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
D00030
000CH 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of TCP RECEIVE REQUEST command data bytes: 12 bytes (000Chex
)
Number of bytes received specified in command data.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST command data
2710H 0001H 8203H FC00H 1000H 0000H C424H 2037H 0000H
D01000
Remote node: Not specified
Host computer IP address: 196.36.32.55
(C4hex.24hex.20hex.37hex
Timeout value: Not set
Local port number: set to 4096 (1000hex
)
)
Results storage area: set to D01020 (03FChex
)
(Refer to page for details on the results storage area.)
TCP socket number (Ethernet Unit socket number): set to 1
Command code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST response
D01010
Re-
sponse
2710H
code
Stores the response after command execution.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TCP PASSIVE OPEN REQUEST results storage area
D01020
D1030
Re-
Remote IP
Remote
sponse
code
address
TCP
port No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP CLOSE REQUEST command data
2714H 0001H 8204H 1A00H
Results storage area: set to D01050 (041Ahex
TCP socket number to close: set to 1 (0001hex
Command code
)
)
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP CLOSE REQUEST response
Re-
D01040
D01050
sponse
2714H
code
TCP CLOSE REQUEST results storage area
Re-
sponse
code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D02000
TCP SEND REQUEST command data
2713H 0001H 820BH C200H 0064H
Send data: 100 bytes (0064hex
)
No. of send bytes: 100 bytes (0064hex
Results storage area: set to D03010 (0BC2hex
TCP socket number
)
)
Command code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP SEND REQUEST response
D03000
Re-
sponse
code
2713H
TCP SEND REQUEST results storage area
D03010
Re-
No. of
sponse bytes
code
sent
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D04000 TCP RECEIVE REQUEST command data
2712H 0001H 820FH B400H 0064H 0000H
Timeout value: Not set
No. of bytes to receive: 100 bytes (0064hex
Results storage area: Set to D04020 (0FB4hex
)
)
TCP socket number
Command code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST response
D04010
D04020
Re-
sponse
code
2712H
TCP RECEIVE REQUEST results storage area
Re-
No. of
sponse bytes
Receive data: 100 bytes (0064hex
)
code
received
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
CIO Area
15 to 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCP
Send
Bit
TCP
Close
Bit
TCP
TCP
CIO 0000
CIO 0001
CIO 0002
Open
Bit
Receive
Bit
TCP
Send
Error
Flag
TCP
Close
Error
Flag
TCP
Open
Error
Flag
TCP
Receive
Error
Flag
TCP
Opening
Flag
TCP
TCP
TCP
Receiving Sending Closing
Flag
Flag
Flag
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Programming Example
000000
@RSET
@SET
TCP Passive Open
When the TCP Open Bit (CIO 000000) turns ON, the TCP
Open Error Flag (CIO 000100) is turned OFF and the TCP
Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
000100
000200
000000
000200
A20200
CMND(490)
When the TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) turns ON, the
status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked to be
sure it is ON and a PASSIVE TCP OPEN REQUEST com-
mand is sent using CMND(490).
D01000
D01010
D00000
D01000: First command word
D01010: First response word
D00000: First control data word
RSET
SET
The TCP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is also turned OFF.
000200
000100
000000 000200 A20200 150900
150914
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Open-
ing Flag (CIO 150900) turns OFF while the TCP Opening
Flag (CIO 000200) is OFF, checks are made and if any of
the following are true, the TCP Open Error Flag (CIO
000100) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D01020
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150914) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D01020) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A021900
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
000000 000200 A20200 150900
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Open Bit (CIO 000000) is turned OFF.
RSET
000000
000101
000201
000001
TCP Close
@RSET
@SET
When the TCP Close Bit (CIO 000001) turns ON, the TCP
Close Error Flag (CIO 000101) is turned OFF and the TCP
Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is turned ON to initialize pro-
cessing.
000001 000201
A20200
CMND(490)
D01030
When the TCP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) turns ON, the
status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked to be
sure it is ON and a TCP CLOSE REQUEST command is
sent using CMND(490).
D01040
D00010
D01030: First command word
D01040: First response word
D00010: First control data word
RSET
SET
The TCP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is also turned OFF.
000201
000101
000001 000201 A20200 150903 150914
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Clos-
ing Flag (CIO 150903) turns OFF while the TCP Closing
Flag (CIO 000201) is OFF, checks are made and if any of
the following are true, the TCP Close Error Flag (CIO
000101) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D01050
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150914) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D01050) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
000001 000201 A20200 150903
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Close Bit (CIO 000001) is turned OFF.
000001
Continued on next page.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Continued from previous page.
000002
TCP Send
@RSET
@SET
When the TCP Send Bit (CIO 000002) turns ON, the
TCP Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned OFF and
the TCP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is turned ON to
initialize processing.
000102
000202
000002
000202
A20200
CMND(490)
When the TCP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) turns ON,
the status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked
to be sure it is ON and a TCP SEND REQUEST com-
mand is sent using CMND(490).
D02000
D03000
D00020
D02000: First command word
D03000: First response word
D00020: First control data word
RSET
SET
The TCP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is also turned
OFF.
000202
000102
000002 000202 A20200 150902
150914
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the
Sending Flag (CIO 150902) turns OFF while the TCP
Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is OFF, checks are made
and if any of the following are true, the TCP Send Error
Flag (CIO 000102) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D03010
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150914) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D03010) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
000002 000202 A20200 150902
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is
ON.
RSET
000002
000103
000203
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Send Bit (CIO 000002) is turned OFF.
000003
TCP Receive
@RSET
@SET
When the TCP Receive Bit (CIO 000003) turns ON, the
TCP Receive Error Flag (CIO 000103) is turned OFF.
The contents of the reception buffer, and the status of the
TCP Data Received/Requested Flag (CIO 150913), and
the Number of Bytes Received at TCP Socket (D30001)
are checked. If the data is stored in the buffer, the TCP
Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON.
150913
=(300)
D30001
&100
000003
000203
A20200
CMND(490)
D04000
When the TCP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON,
the status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked
to be sure it is ON and a TCP RECEIVE REQUEST
command is sent using CMND(490).
D04010
D00030
D04000: First command word
D04010: First response word
D00030: First control data word
RSET
SET
The TCP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is also turned
OFF.
000203
000103
000003 000203 A20200 150901
150914
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Re-
ceiving Flag (CIO 150901) turns OFF while the TCP Re-
ceiving Flag (CIO 000203) is OFF, checks are made and if
any of the following are true, the TCP Receive Error Flag
(CIO 000103) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D04020
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150914) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D04020) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
000003 000203 A20200 150901
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the TCP
Receive Bit (CIO 000003) is turned OFF.
000003
END(001)
Note When using the above programming example, change the bit and word
addresses as necessary to avoid using the same areas used by other parts of
the user program or the CPU Bus Unit.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
6-8-9 UDP/IP Communications Programming Example
The following programming example illustrates transferring 100 bytes of data
between an Ethernet Unit and
communications.
a
host computer using UDP/IP
For the UDP connection, the Ethernet Unit uses a PASSIVE OPEN and the
host computer uses an ACTIVE OPEN.
System Configuration
The system configuration for the program example and the Ethernet Unit
system setup are shown below.
Host computer
Ethernet Unit
PLC
IP address:
196.36.32.55
IP address:
196.36.32.101
4096
Port number: 4096
Port number:
FINS network address:
Node address:
Unit number:
01 Hex
01 Hex
10 Hex
Basic Operations
• CIO 000000 is turned ON to request opening a UDP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000001 is turned ON to request closing the UDP socket from the
Ethernet Unit.
• CIO 000002 is turned ON to request sending data from the Ethernet Unit.
Data (100 bytes) is sent beginning at D02008.
• CIO 000003 is turned ON to request receiving data from the Ethernet
• One of the bits between CIO 000100 and CIO 000103 will turn ON if an
error occurs. Refer to 6-7-5 Socket Service Request Switches for informa-
tion on errors. The following areas can be used to access details about
errors:
CMND(490) response codes
Response codes in results storage area
Network Communications Error Flags (A21900 to A21907)
Completion codes (A203 to A210)
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Program Memory Maps
The send and receive data and bits (flags) used by the program are shown in
the following diagrams.
DM Area
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CMND(490) control data for UDP OPEN REQUEST
000AH 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
D00000
Response monitor time: 5 s
FINS communications port: Port #0
Remote Ethernet Unit designation
Network address: 01hex
Node address: 01hex
Unit address: 10hex
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of UDP OPEN REQUEST command data bytes: 10 bytes (000A
)
hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D00010
CMND(490) control data for UDP CLOSE REQUEST
0008H 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number of bytes to receive: 4 bytes
Number of UDP CLOSE REQUEST command data bytes: 8 bytes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CMND(490) control data for UDP SEND REQUEST
0074H 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
D00020
Number of UDP SEND REQUEST command data bytes: 116 (0074
Command format = 16 bytes + 100 bytes send data
) bytes
hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CMND(490) control data for UDP RECEIVE REQUEST
000CH 0004H 0001H 0110H 0000H 0032H
Number bytes to receive: 4 bytes
D00030
Number of UDP RECEIVE REQUEST command data bytes: 12 bytes (000Chex
)
Number of bytes received is specified in command data.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UDP OPEN REQUEST command data
2701H 0001H 8203H FC00H 1000H
D01000
Local port number: set to 4096 (1000hex
Results storage area: set to D01020 (03FChex
)
)
UDP socket number (Ethernet Unit socket number): set to 1
Command code
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
8
9
UDP OPEN response
Re-
sponse
2701H
D01010
code
Stores the response after command execution.
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
UDP OPEN REQUEST results storage area
D01020
D01030
Re-
sponse
code
0
1
2
3
4
5
UDP CLOSE REQUEST command data
2704H 0001H 8204H 1A00H
Results storage area: set to D01050 (041Ahex
UDP socket number closed: set to 1 (0001hex
Command code
)
)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UDP CLOSE REQUEST response
Re-
D01040
D01050
sponse
2704H
code
UDP CLOSE REQUEST results storage area
Re-
sponse
code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D02000
UDP SEND REQUEST command data
2703H 0001H 820BH C200H C424H 2037H 1000H 0064H
No. of send bytes: 100 bytes (0064hex
)
Remote port: Port #4096 (1000hex
)
Remote address: 196.36.32.55
(C4hex.24hex.20hex.37hex
)
Results storage area: Set to D03010 (0BC2hex
UDP socket number
Command code
)
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UDP SEND REQUEST response
D03000
D03010
Re-
sponse
2703H
code
UDP SEND REQUEST results storage area
Re-
sponse
code
No. of
send
bytes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D04000 UDP RECEIVE REQUEST command data
2702H 0001H 820FH B400H 0064H 0000H
Timeout value: Not set
No. of bytes to receive: 100 bytes (0064hex
Results storage area: set to D04020 (0FB4hex
UDP socket number used
Command code
)
)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST response
D04010
D04020
Re-
sponse
code
2702H
UDP RECEIVE REQUEST results storage area
Re-
sponse
code
No. of
bytes to
receive
Source
Source IP
address
Receive data: 100 bytes (0064hex
)
port
number
CIO Area
15 to 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UDP
Send
Bit
UDP
Close
Bit
UDP
Open
Bit
UDP
Receive
Bit
CIO 0000
UDP
Send
Error
Flag
UDP
Close
Error
Flag
UDP
Open
Error
Flag
UDP
CIO 0001
CIO 0002
Receive
Error
Flag
UDP
Opening
Flag
UDP
UDP
UDP
Receiving Sending Closing
Flag
Flag
Flag
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Programming Example
000000
@RSET
@SET
UDP Passive Open
When the UDP Open Bit (CIO 000000) turns ON, the
UDP Open Error Flag (CIO 000100) is turned OFF and
the UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is turned ON to
initialize processing.
000100
000200
000000
000200
A20200
CMND(490)
D01000
When the UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) turns ON,
the status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked
to be sure it is ON and a UDP OPEN REQUEST com-
mand is sent using CMND(490).
D01010
D00000
D01000: First command word
D01010: First response word
D00000: First control data word
RSET
SET
The UDP Opening Flag (CIO 000200) is also turned
OFF.
000200
000100
000000 000200 A20200 150100 150114
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Open-
ing Flag (CIO 150100) turns OFF while the UDP Opening
Flag (CIO 000200) is OFF, checks are made and if any of
the following are true, the UDP Open Error Flag (CIO
000100) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D01020
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150114) is ON.
A21900
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D01020) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
000000 000200 A20200 150100
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
RSET
000000 After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Open Bit (CIO 000000) is turned OFF.
000001
@RSET
@SET
UDP Close
When the UDP Close Bit (CIO 000001) turns ON, the
UDP Close Error Flag (CIO 000101) is turned OFF and
the UDP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is turned ON to ini-
tialize processing.
000101
000201
000001
000201
A20200
When the UDP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) turns ON, the
status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked to
be sure it is ON and a UDP CLOSE REQUEST command
is sent using CMND(490).
CMND(490)
D01030
D01040
D00010
D01030: First command word
D01040: First response word
D00010: First control data word
The UDP Closing Flag (CIO 000201) is also turned OFF.
RSET
SET
000201
000101
000001 000201 A20200 150103
150114
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Clos-
ing Flag (CIO 150103) turns OFF while the UDP Closing
Flag (CIO 000201) is OFF, checks are made and if any of
the following are true, the UDP Close Error Flag (CIO
000101) is turned ON.
<>(305)
D01050
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150114) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D01050) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
000001 000201 A20200 150103
RSET
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Close Bit (CIO 000001) is turned OFF.
000001
Continued on next page.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Socket Services with CMND(490)
Section 6-8
Continued from previous page.
000002
UDP Send
@RSET
@SET
When the UDP Send Bit (CIO 000002) turns ON, the UDP
Send Error Flag (CIO 000102) is turned OFF and the
UDP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is turned ON to initialize
processing.
000102
000202
When the UDP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) turns ON, the
status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked to be
sure it is ON and a UDP SEND REQUEST command is
sent using CMND(490).
000002
000202 A20200
D02000: First command word
CMND(490)
D03000: First response word
D02000
D03000
D00020: First control data word
The UDP Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is also turned OFF.
D00020
000202
RSET
SET
000002 000202
A20200 150102 150114
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the
Sending Flag (CIO 150102) turns OFF while the UDP
Sending Flag (CIO 000202) is OFF, checks are made and
if any of the following are true, the UDP Send Error Flag
(CIO 000102) is turned ON.
000102
<>(305)
D03010
#0000
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150114) is ON.
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the
command code (D03010) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
000002 000202 A20200
150102
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Send Bit (CIO 000002) is turned OFF.
RSET
000002
000103
000203
000003
@RSET
@SET
UDP Receive
When the UDP Receive Bit (CIO 000003) turns ON, the
UDP Receive Error Flag (CIO 000103) is turned OFF
and the UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is turned ON
to initialize processing.
000003
000203
A20200
CMND(490)
When the UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) turns ON, the
status of the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) is checked to be
D04000
D04010 sure it is ON and a UDP RECEIVE REQUEST command is
sent using CMND(490).
D00030
D04000: First command word
D04010: First response word
D00030: First control data word
RSET
SET
The UDP Receiving Flag (CIO 000203) is also turned OFF.
000203
000003 000203 A20200 150101 150114
If the Port Enabled Flag (A20200) turns ON and the Re-
ceiving Flag (CIO 150101) turns OFF while the UDP Re-
000103
ceiving Flag (CIO 000203) is OFF, checks are made and if
any of the following are true, the UDP Receive Error Flag
(CIO 000103) is turned ON.
<>(305)
The Results Storage Error Flag (CIO 150114) is ON.
D04020
#0000
The contents of the Response Storage Area set in the com-
mand code (D04020) is not 0000 Hex (normal end).
A21900
The Network Communications Error Flag (A21900) is ON.
000003 000203 A20200 150101
After the execution results have been checked, the UDP
Receive Bit (CIO 000003) is turned OFF.
RSET
000003
END(001)
Note When using the above programming example, change the bit and word
addresses as necessary to avoid using the same areas used by other parts of
the user program or the CPU Bus Unit.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions in Using Socket Services
Section 6-9
6-9 Precautions in Using Socket Services
6-9-1 UDP and TCP Socket Services
• If a short response monitor time is specified in CMND(490) control data
and the Ethernet Unit is operating under a high load, a result may be
stored even if the response code indicates a time-out. If this occurs,
increase the monitor time specified with CMND(490).
• The socket status area in the CIO Area is zeroed when the PLC’s operat-
ing mode is changed (e.g., from PROGRAM to RUN). The actual Ethernet
Unit socket status, however, will remain unchanged after the socket status
area is zeroed. To avoid this problem, use the IOM Hold setting in the PLC
Setup. Refer to the PLC’s operation manuals for details on settings.
• The Results Storage Error Flag will turn ON in the socket status to indi-
cate that the specified Results Storage Area does not exist in the PLC.
Correct the user program.
• Communications time may increase if multiple Ethernet Unit functions are
used simultaneously or due to the contents of the user program.
• Communications efficiency may decrease due to high communications
loads on the network.
• All data is flushed from the socket’s communications buffer when a socket
is closed with the CLOSE REQUEST command. In some cases, the
transmit data for the SEND REQUEST command issued just before the
socket was closed may not be sent.
• When sockets are open, the Ethernet Unit provides a 4,096-byte buffer for
each TCP socket and 9,016-byte buffer for each UDP socket to allow data
to be received at any time. These buffers are shared by all open sockets.
Receive data will be discarded for a socket if the buffer becomes full. The
user application must therefore issue RECEIVE REQUEST commands
frequently enough to prevent the internal buffers from becoming full.
6-9-2 UDP Socket Service
• The UDP socket sets a broadcast address for the remote node address to
broadcast data to all nodes of the network simultaneously. The maximum
length of broadcast data is 1,472 bytes. Data in multiple fragments (over
1,473 bytes for a UDP socket) cannot be broadcast.
• The UDP socket does not check the transmitted data to ensure communi-
cations reliability. To increase communication reliability, communications
checks and retries must be included in the user application program.
6-9-3 TCP Socket Service
• If the TCP socket of the remote node closes (the connection is broken)
during communications, the TCP socket at the local node must also be
closed. The communications Results Storage Area can be used to check
if the connection has been broken. Close the local socket immediately
after detecting that the remote TCP socket has closed. The following situ-
ations indicate that the remote socket has closed.
TCP Receive Results Storage Area:
Response code = 004B (error at remote node)
TCP Send Results Storage Area:
Response code = 0020 (connection broken with remote socket during
transmission)
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions in Using Socket Services
Section 6-9
• Data can remain in a buffer at the local node if the remote TCP socket
closes during communications. Any data remaining in the buffer will be
discarded when the TCP socket is closed. To avoid problems of this
nature, steps will have to be taken in the application program, such as
sending data to enable closing, and then only closing once reception of
this data has been confirmed.
• When closing a connection for a TCP socket, the first port to be closed
cannot be reopened for at least 60 seconds after the other port closes.
However, this restriction does not apply for a port opened using the TCP
ACTIVE OPEN REQUEST command with a local TCP port number of 0
(port number automatically assigned) which is closed from the side that
actively opened the socket.
• A connection is established for a passively opened socket by actively
opening it from another socket. A connection will not be established by a
different socket attempting to actively open the socket that is already
actively opening a socket. Similarly, a connection will not be established if
a different socket attempts to passively open a socket that is already
being passively opened by another socket. You cannot actively open mul-
tiple connections to a socket passively opened at the Ethernet Unit.
• The Ethernet Unit TCP sockets have no KEEP ALIVE function to check
that the connection is normal if communications do not occur for a set
time period through a communications line for which a connection has
been established. The Ethernet Unit’s TCP sockets make no checks to
the socket at the other node. Checks made by the remote node, however,
are received as responses, so that it is not necessary for the user pro-
gram to consider the KEEP ALIVE function.
6-9-4 Precautions in Using Socket Service Request Switches
• Send and reception processing can not be performed at the same time
when Socket Service Request Switches are used for socket services
because there is only one Socket Service Parameter Area for each
socket. For example, if the Send Request Switch is turned ON when data
is being received, the response code will be 110C hexadecimal, indicating
that a Request Switch was turned ON during communications processing.
(The response code for the reception will overwrite this code when pro-
cessing has been completed.)
• If more than one Request Switch is turned ON simultaneously, the
response code will be 110C hexadecimal and all requested processing
will end in an error.
• Close processing can be performed, however, even during open, send, or
receive processing. This enables emergency close processing. Also, the
only parameter required for close processing is the socket number, so a
socket can be closed even when parameters are set for another process.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions in Using Socket Services
Section 6-9
6-9-5 Maximum Transmission Delays (Ignoring other Network Delays)
The transmission delays for socket service is calculated as the sum of the
communications processing times for both nodes.
Transmission delay = Remote node send processing time + Local node
receive processing time + Local node send processing time + Remote
node receive processing time
Calculate the maximum Ethernet Unit transmission delays for sending and
receiving using the following formulas. These times are the same for both
UDP and TCP.
■ Requesting UDP Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
CS/CJ CPU Units
Transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 7 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.002 + 22 (ms)
CS-H/CJ-H CPU Units
Transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 7 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.001 + 17 (ms)
■ Requesting TCP Socket Services by Manipulating Dedicated Control Bits
CS/CJ CPU Units
Transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 7 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.002 + 29 (ms)
CS-H/CJ-H CPU Units
Transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 7 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.001 + 21 (ms)
■ Requesting UDP Socket Services by Executing CMND(490)
CS/CJ CPU Units
transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 3 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.002 + A (ms) (See note 1.)
Note 1: When the CPU Unit cycle time is less than 2 ms, A=45, and when it is
2 ms or more, A = 67
CS-H/CJ-H CPU Units
transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 2 + number of send/receive bytes × 0.001 + A (ms) (See note 2.)
Note 2: When the CPU Unit cycle time is less than 2 ms, A = 26, and when it
is 2 ms or more, A = 52
■ TCP Socket Services Using CMND(490)
CS/CJ CPU Units
Transmission processing time = Reception processing time = CPU Unit
cycle time × 3 + number of bytes sent/received × 0.002 + A (ms) (See note
3.)
Note 3: When the CPU Unit cycle time is less than 2 ms, A = 46, and when it
is 2 ms or more, A = 68
CS-H/CJ-H CPU Units
transmission processing time = reception processing time = CPU Unit cycle
time × 2 + number of bytes sent/received × 0.001+ A (ms) (See note 4.)
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions in Using Socket Services
Section 6-9
Note 4: When the CPU Unit cycle time is less than 2 ms, A = 27, and when it
is 2 ms or more, A = 53
Note
1. The values obtained from the above equations are guidelines for the trans-
mission delay time when one socket in the Ethernet Unit is used only. The
execution time required for the user program is not included.
2. The communications time for the remote nodes depends on the device be-
ing used. For remote nodes that are not Ethernet Units, calculate the com-
munications time according to the device's operation manual.
3. The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger
than those calculated with the methods given here. Among the causes of
longer delays are the following: traffic on the network, window sizes at net-
work nodes, traffic through the Ethernet Unit (e.g., simultaneous servicing
of multiple sockets and socket service communications, etc.), and the sys-
tem configuration.
4. The above values are guidelines when the default (4%) for the uniform pe-
ripheral servicing time in the PLC System Setup is used.
5. By increasing the value of the uniform peripheral servicing time, the maxi-
mum transmission delay time for socket services can be shorter.
Example: When using TCP socket services between two PLCs (CS-H CPU
Units) by executing the CMND(490) instruction to send/receive 512 bytes in
both directions the guideline for the maximum transmission delay time can be
calculated according to the following conditions as shown in the table below.
CPU Unit cycle time (local node) = 5 ms
CPU Unit cycle time (remote node) = 10 ms
Item
Calculation
Reception processing
time (local node)
5 × 2 + 512 × 0.001 + 53 = 63.512 ms ≈ 63.5 ms
Transmission processing
time (local node)
5 × 2 + 512 × 0.001 + 53 = 63.512 ms ≈ 63.5 ms
Transmission processing
time (remote node)
10 × 2 + 512 × 0.001 + 53 = 73.512 ms ≈ 73.5 ms
Reception processing
time (remote node)
10 × 2 + 512 × 0.001 + 53 = 73.512 ms ≈ 73.5 ms
Maximum transmission
delay
63.5 + 63.5 + 73.5 + 73.5 = 274 ms
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
Using FINS Communications to Create Host Applications
This section provides information on communicating on Ethernet Systems and interconnected networks using FINS
commands. The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to Ethernet Units.
FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions programmed
into the user ladder-diagram program. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
7-1 Overview of FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Communications On an Ethernet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet . . . . . .
7-2 FINS Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 Sending Commands from a Host Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 FINS/TCP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2 FINS/TCP Mode Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3 Sending Commands from a Host Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
161
161
162
163
163
166
171
171
177
184
192
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of FINS Communications
Section 7-1
7-1 Overview of FINS Communications
7-1-1 Communications On an Ethernet Network
Data is sent and received as UDP packets or UDP packets on an Ethernet
network.
PLC
or host computer
Ethernet Unit
UDP packet (FINS command)
Ethernet
UDP packet (FINS response)
Ethernet Unit
PLC
In the FINS communications service, both an IP address for IP (the Internet
layer) and a FINS node address for FINS (the application layer) are used for
the remote device. Also, 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP
or TCP port number (i.e., the transport layer) for identifying the application
layer, i.e., the FINS communications service. (Another number can be set for
the FINS/UDP port from the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.)
For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP/TCP
port numbers, refer to the subsection IP Addresses in FINS Communications
under SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses in the Operation Manual Con-
struction of Networks.
FINS
Application Layer
Transport Layer
Node Address
TCP
UDP
IP
UDP Port No.
TCP Port No.
IP Address
Internet Layer
Physical Layer
Ethernet
Ethernet Address
The FINS communications service is a communications method based on
UDP/IP, and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet-related products. (In
this manual it is called the FINS/UDP method.) In addition to supporting the
FINS/UDP method, the CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 support FINS com-
munications using TCP/IP. (In this manual, this is called the FINS/TCP
method.)
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of FINS Communications
Section 7-1
7-1-2 Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods
It is recommended that FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP be used as follows:
• When remote devices do not support the FINS/TCP method:
Use the FINS/UDP method for FINS communications with those devices.
• When FINS nodes are connected on the same Ethernet segment:
Use the FINS/UDP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/UDP offers a slight advantage in performance.
• When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
• When the quality of connections is unreliable, as with wireless LAN:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
7-1-3 FINS Communications Service Specifications for Ethernet
Item
Specifications
Number of nodes
Message length
Number of buffers
Protocol name
Protocol used
254
2,012 bytes max.
192
FINS/UDP method
UDP/IP
FINS/TCP method
TCP/IP
The selection of UDP/IP or TCP/IP is made by means of the FINS/TCP Tab in the CX-Pro-
grammer's Unit Setup.
Number of connections ---
16
Port number
Protection
Other
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
No
Yes (Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a
server)
Items set for each UDP
port
Items set for each connection
• Server/client specification
• Broadcast
• Remote IP address specification
• Address conversion
method
When client: Specify remote Ethernet Unit (server) IP address
When server: Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con-
nect
• Automatic FINS node address allocation:
Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses
• Keep-alive
Specify whether remote node keep-alive is to be used.
TCP/IP Setting:
• Remote node keep-alive time.
Internal table
This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses, remote IP addresses, TCP/
UDP, and remote port numbers. It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the
PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted, and it is automatically changed when a connection
is established by means of the FINS/TCP method or when a FINS command received.
The following functions are enabled by using this table.
• IP address conversion using the FINS/UDP method
• Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS/
TCP method
• Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS/TCP method
• Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Frames
Section 7-2
7-2 FINS Frames
The FINS communications service is carried out through the exchange of
FINS command frames and their corresponding response frames. (There are
also commands with no responses.)
Both command frames and response frames are comprised of a FINS header
for storing transfer control information, a FINS command field for storing a
command, and a FINS parameter/data field for storing command parameters
and transmission/response data.
FINS command frames and FINS response frames are used with both FINS/
UDP and FINS/TCP.
FINS Command
Frame Format
Size (bytes)
Contents
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Displays frame information
Reserved by system.
ICF
RSV
GCT
DNA
DA1
Permissible number of gateways
Destination network address
Destination node address
Destination unit address
FINS header
DA2
SNA
Source network address
Source node address
Source unit address
SA1
SA2
SID
Service ID
MRC
Main request code
Sub-request code
FINS command
SRC
Command parameters and send data
Parameter/
data field
2000 max.
FINS parameter/data
The data length depends on the MRC and SRC.
FINS Response
Frame Format
Size (bytes)
Contents
10
2
Same as in command frame.
Same as in command frame.
FINS header
FINS command
MRES
SRES
1
Main response code
Sub-response code
1
FINS
parameter/data field
1998 max.
Data
Response data
There are some frames in which
the data length is 0.
FINS Header
Information
ICF (Information Control
Field)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
1
0
0
0
0
0
Response Request Bit
(0: Response required; 1: Response not required)
Kind of data (0: command; 1: response)
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
RSV (Reserved by
System)
Set to 00 (Hex).
Set to 02 (Hex).
GCT (Permissible Number
of Gateways)
DNA (Destination Network
Address)
Specifies the number of the network where the destination node is located.
The address can be specified in the following range.
00 (Hex):
Local network
01 to 7F (Hex):
Destination network address (1 to 127)
DA1 (Destination Node
Address
Specifies the number of the node where the command is being sent. This
node address is the address used for FINS, and is different from the IP
address used for Ethernet.
00 (Hex):
01 to FE (Hex): Destination node address (1 to 254)
FF (Hex): Broadcasting
Local PLC Unit
When multiple Communications Units are mounted, DA1 specifies the node
address of the Unit connected to the network specified by DNA.
DA2 (Destination Unit
Address)
Specifies the number of the Unit at the destination node.
00 (Hex):
PLC (CPU Unit)
10 to 1F (Hex):
E1 (Hex):
CPU Bus Unit unit numbers 0 to15 (16 to 31)
Inner Board
FE (Hex):
Unit connected to network.
SNA (Source Network
Address)
Specifies the number of the network where the local node is located. The
ranges of numbers that can be specified are the same as for DNA.
SA1 (Source Node
Address)
Specifies the local node address. The ranges of numbers that can be speci-
fied are the same as for DA1.
SA1 (Source Unit
Address)
Specifies the number of the Unit at the local node.The ranges of numbers that
can be specified are the same as for DA2.
SID (Service ID)
The SID is used to identify the process that data is sent from. Any number can
be set between 00 to FF hexadecimal for the SID. The same value set for the
SID in the command is returned by the node sending the response, allowing
commands and responses to be matched when commands are sent in suc-
cession to the same Unit.
7-3 FINS/UDP Method
7-3-1 Overview
FINS/UDP Features
The FINS/UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP/
IP protocol. UDP/IP is a connectionless communications protocol. When a
message is sent from one node to another, the two nodes have an equal rela-
tionship and there is no clear connection. If using TCP is like making a tele-
phone call, then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand. Although the
UDP protocol is fast, data communications are less reliable than with TCP.
In particular, when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing,
the user must program measures, such as retries, into applications in order to
improve reliability.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
Node
Node
Data transmission 1
Data transmission 2
Data transmission 3
Data is sent in one direction, with no
confirmation of whether the data was
received. Because there are few procedures
involved, data can be sent at high speed but
with less reliability than with TCP.
The FINS/UDP method has the following features:
• Because FINS/UDP is a connectionless protocol, there is no limit to the
number of corrections.
• FINS/UDP can be used for broadcasting.
• When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers (such as the
Internet), communications reliability drops.
FINS/UDP Frame
Format
The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending
and receiving data on an Ethernet network.
EthernetV.2
IP
UDP
FINS frame
FCS
UDP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/UDP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, UDP frame, and FINS frame. A UDP data sec-
tion (FINS frame) that exceeds 1,472 bytes is split into packets for transmis-
sion. The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP/IP protocol
layer. There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this
split, but it may not be possible to send 1,472-byte UDP packets over an IP
network with multiple layers. When using the FINS communications service in
a system such as this, select the FINS/TCP method.
UDP Port Numbers for
FINS/UDP
The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed by UDP/IP, this port number must be allocated to the communi-
cations service.
The default setting for the FINS/UDP local UDP port number (i.e., the Ether-
net Unit's UDP port number) is 9600. To set another number, make the setting
for the FINS/UDP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.
At the Ethernet Unit, a UDP/IP frame received with a FINS/UDP port number
is recognized as a FINS frame.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
The UDP port number for the host application (e.g., personal computer) func-
tions differently from the ports that can be used depending on the setting for
the address conversion method at the Ethernet Unit. Basically, the same num-
ber can be used for the UDP port number set in the Ethernet Unit (default:
9600), but the number does not need to be the same as the Ethernet Unit
under the following application conditions.
• Sending commands from the host application when the automatic gener-
ation (dynamic) method is used as the Ethernet Unit’s address conversion
method.
• Sending commands from the host application without registering the IP
addresses in the IP table when the IP address table method is used as
the Ethernet Unit’s address conversion method.
• Sending commands from the host application without registering the IP
addresses in the IP table when the combined method is used as the
Ethernet Unit’s address conversion method.
For each address conversion method, when commands are sent from the
Ethernet Unit, use the same value set in the Ethernet Unit for the UDP port
number of the host application.
Procedure for Using
FINS/UDP
1.
Make the basic settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual Construction of Networks.
↓
2.
Make the settings in the Unit Setup.
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the CX-Programmer's I/O
Table Window. Right-click, and select Unit Setup. Then make the following settings in the Unit
Setup Window.
Setup Tab
• Broadcast
• FINS/UDP port (Default: 9600)
• IP address table (for the IP address table method or combined method)
↓
3.
4.
Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Net, and transfer them to each PLC.
↓
Create a ladder program that includes the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
Note
Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Pro-
grammer).
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network. For details
on routing table, refer to the section on Creating Routing Tables in the Opera-
tion Manual, Construction of Networks: Section 6 FINS Communications.
7-3-2 Sending Commands from a Host Computer
When sending FINS commands from a computer, the command data in the
computer’s program must be created in command frame format. The frame
formats are also used to decode the responses received from other network
nodes.
Designating Remote
Addresses
The host computer’s UDP sockets are used when sending FINS commands
from a host computer to a PLC. This section provides examples of addressing
remote CPU Units from the host computer for communications.
Note
(1) The FINS UDP port number at the Ethernet Unit is set to the default of
9600. It can be changed in the Unit Setup.
(2) Even if the Ethernet network is comprised of multiple segments, set the
same value for the FINS network address.
■ Example 1: Host Computer and Remote Node (Ethernet Unit) on Same
Network
Host computer
IP address: 196.36.32.50
FINS network/node/unit: 1/50/0 (hex)
Remote node
IP address: 196.36.32.100
FINS network/node/unit: i/100/0 (hex)
Ethernet
Communications Parameters Used by Host Computer
Destination IP Address: 196.36.32.100 (Ethernet Unit of remote node)
UDP port number:
FINS UDP port No. (Ethernet Unit of remote node)
FINS addresses (Remote node CPU Unit):
Network address: 1
Node address: 100
Unit number: 0
FINS addresses (Host computer):
Network address: 1
Node address: 50
Unit number: 0
■ Example 2: Host Computer and Remote Node Connected Via Relay Node
(Ethernet Unit)
Host computer
Host computer
IP address: 196.36.32.50
FINS network/node/unit: 1/50/0 (hex)
IP address: 196.36.32.50
FINS network/node/unit:
1/50/0 (hex)
Relay node
IP address:
196.36.32.100
Ethernet
Unit
Controller Link
Controller Link Unit
Ethernet
Destination IP Address: 196.36.32.100 (Ethernet Unit of relay node)
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
UDP port number:
FINS UDP port number (Ethernet Unit of relay node)
FINS addresses (Remote node CPU Unit):
Network address: 2
Node address: 1
Unit number: 0
FINS addresses (Host computer):
Network address: 1
Node address: 50
Unit number: 0
FINS/UDP Sample
Program
Operation Overview
• This program reads 150 words of the PLC memory beginning at D00100
by sending a FINS command (MEMORY AREA READ, command code
0101) from a UNIX workstation (WS) to the PLC on the Ethernet network.
• If no response is received within two seconds of sending the FINS com-
mand, the command will be resent.
Settings
• The Ethernet Unit IP address is 196.36.32.100, and the FINS node
address is 100. IP address conversion is set to automatic generation
(dynamic).
• The FINS UDP port number for the Ethernet Unit is 9600 (default).
• The workstation’s IP address is 196.36.32.50 and its FINS node address
is 50.
• The FINS UDP port number for the workstation can be a user-set number
(if set to 0, the system automatically allocates an available port).
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
Sample Program
1 #include <errno.h>
2 #include <stdio.h>
3 #include <sys/types.h>
4 #include <sys/socket.h>
5 #include <netinet/in.h>
6 #include <signal.h>
7
8 #define FINS_UDP_PORT 9600
9 #define SERV_IP_ADDR "196.36.32.100" /* Ethernet Unit IP ADDRESS*/
10 #define MAX_MSG 2010
11 #define RESP_TIMEOUT 2
12
13
14 /*
15 * FINS/UDP COMMUNICATIONS SAMPLE PROGRAM
16 */
17 main(argc,argv)
18 int argc;
19 char *argv[];
20 {
21 int sockfd;
22 struct sockaddr_in ws_addr, cs_addr;
23 char fins_cmnd[MAX_MSG], fins_resp[MAX_MSG];
24 int sendlen, recvlen, addrlen;
25 char sid = 0;
26 extern recv_fail();
27
28 /*
GENERATE UDP SOCKET*/
29 if ((sockfd = socket(AF_INET,SOCK_DGRAM,0)) < 0)
30
31
err_exit("can't open datagram socket");
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
ALLOCATE IP ADDRESS AND PORT
#
TO SOCKET*/
32 /*
33 bzero((char *) & s_addr,sizeof(ws_addr));
34 ws_addr.sin_family = AF_INET;
35 ws_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(INADDR_ANY);
GET AVAILABLE PORT FOR LOCAL UDP PORT
36 ws_addr.sin_port = htons(0); /*
37 if (bind(sockfd,(struct sockaddr *)&ws_addr,sizeof(ws_addr)) < 0)
*/
38
err_exit("can't bind local address");
39
40 /*
41
*
GENERATE MEMORY AREA READ COMMAND
42 * (READ 150 WORDS FROM DM 100)
43 */
44 fins_cmnd[0] = 0x80; /* ICF */
45 fins_cmnd[1] = 0x00; /* RSV */
46 fins_cmnd[2] = 0x02; /* GCT */
47 fins_cmnd[3] = 0x00; /* DNA */
48 fins_cmnd[4] = 0x64; /* DA1 *//* Ethernet Unit FINS NODE NUMBER*/
49 fins_cmnd[5] = 0x00; /* DA2 */
50 fins_cmnd[6] = 0x00; /* SNA */
51 fins_cmnd[7] = 0x32; /* SA1 *//* WS FINS NODE NUMBER*/
52 fins_cmnd[8] = 0x00; /* SA2 */
53 fins_cmnd[9] = ++sid; /* SID */
54 fins_cmnd[10] = 0x01; /* MRC */
55 fins_cmnd[11] = 0x01; /* SRC */
56 fins_cmnd[12] =
0x82; /* VARIABLE TYPE: DM*/
57 fins_cmnd[13] = 0x00; /* READ START ADDRESS: DM 100*/
58 fins_cmnd[14] = 0x64;
59 fins_cmnd[15] = 0x00;
60 fins_cmnd[16] = 0x00; /* WORDS READ: 150*/
61 fins_cmnd[17] = 0x96;
62
63 /* SEND FINS COMMAND*/
64 bzero((char *) &cs_addr,sizeof(cs_addr));
65 cs_addr.sin_family = AF_INET;
66 cs_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = inet_addr(SERV_IP_ADDR);
67 cs_addr.sin_port = htons(FINS_UDP_PORT);
68
69 signal(SIGALRM,recv_fail);
70
71 CMND_SEND:
72 sendlen = 18;
73
74 if (sendto(sockfd,fins_cmnd,sendlen,0,&cs_addr,sizeof(cs_addr)) == sendlen)
75
76
77
78
{
alarm(RESP_TIMEOUT); /* START RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
printf("send length %d¥n",sendlen);
}
79 else
80
81
82
83
84
{
err_exit("send error");
}
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 7-3
85 /* RECEIVE FINS RESPONSE*/
86 addrlen = sizeof(cs_addr);
87
88 if ((recvlen = recvfrom(sockfd,fins_resp,MAX_MSG,0,&cs_addr,&addrlen)) < 0)
89
90
91
92
93
{
if (errno == EINTR)
goto CMND_SEND; /*
err_exit("receive error");
RE-SEND FINS COMMAND*/
}
94 else
95
96
{
STOP RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
alarm(0); /*
97
printf("recv length %d¥n",recvlen);
98
99
if (recvlen < 14) /*
ILLEGAL RESPONSE LENGTH CHECK*/
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
err_exit("FINS length error");
if ((fins_cmnd[3] != fins_resp[6]) || (fins_cmnd[4] != fins_resp[7]) ||
(fins_cmnd[5] != fins_resp[8]) )
{ /* DESTINATION ADDRESS CHECK*/
err_exit("illegal source address error");
}
if(fins_cmnd[9] != fins_resp[9]) /* SID CHECK*/
err_exit("illegal SID error");
}
110 /*
CLOSE SOCKET*/
111 close(sockfd);
112
113 }
114
115
116 /*
ERROR PROCESSING FUNCTIONS
117 *
118 */
119 err_exit(err_msg)
120 char *err_msg;
121 {
122 printf("client: %s %x¥n",err_msg,errno);
123 exit(1);
124 }
125
126 /*
SIGNAL CAPTURE FUNCTIONS
127 *
128 */
129 recv_fail()
130 {
131 printf("response timeout error ¥n");
132 }
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
7-4 FINS/TCP Method
7-4-1 Overview
FINS/TCP Features
The FINS/TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP/
IP protocol. TCP/IP is a connection-type communications protocol. Before a
message is sent from one node to another, it is necessary to establish a vir-
tual circuit, i.e., a connection. Once a connection has been established, com-
munications are quite reliable. The arrival of data that is sent via the
connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement (ACK) response, and retries
are executed automatically as required.
The FINS/TCP method has been newly added to the CS1W-ETN21 and
CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units. When FINS/TCP is used, it must be determined
which node is the server and which is the client.
For communications between a personal computer and a PLC, the computer
should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server. For communi-
cations between two PLCs, either one can be set as the client and the other
as the server.
Node
(Client)
Node
(Server)
Request to establish a connection
Connection established
Acknowledgement
Data transmission 1
Acknowledgement
An acknowledgement is received whenever a
connection is established or data is sent, so
transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower.
Compared to the FINS/UDP method, the FINS/TCP method has the following
characteristics.
• Data transmission is more reliable, due to factors such as retry process-
ing at the TCP/IP layer. The FINS/TCP method is thus better suited to
dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several
layers.
• Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server (i.e.,
the server can be protected from access by non-specified IP addresses).
• Broadcasting cannot be used.
• TCP/IP has various retry procedures, and this tends to lower its perfor-
mance in comparison with UDP/IP.
• There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made (i.e., 16
connections maximum), and any given node can communicate only with
up to 16 other nodes at a time.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
• Once a FINS/TCP connection (connection number, remote IP address)
has been set in the Unit Setup, it can be dynamically changed from the
ladder program using a FINS command (i.e., FINS/TCP CONNECTION
REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
FINS/TCP Frame
Format
The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an
Ethernet network.
Ethernet V.2
IP
TCP
FINS/TCP header
FINS frame
FCS
TCP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/TCP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, TCP frame, FINS/TCP header frame, and FINS
frame. A TCP data section (FINS/TCP header + FINS frame) that exceeds the
segment size (Ethernet Unit default: 1,024 bytes, with automatic adjustment
for optimum values between the nodes) is split into TCP packets for transmis-
sion. The split TCP data tends to be joined automatically at the remote node's
TCP/IP protocol layer. The TCP/IP protocol layer, however, cannot determine
where the data has been split, so the TCP data sections from multiple packets
are all joined together. Therefore, when using the FINS/TCP method, FINS/
TCP headers must be added at the beginning of FINS frames in order to
serve as FINS frame delimiters. The length of the data in the following FINS
frame is stored in the header, allowing the frame to be separated out by the
remote node. With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGateway Ver. 2003 the appropri-
ate frames are separated out automatically. When constructing applications
using the TCP/IP socket interface on the host computer, processing is
required to separate out the FINS frames.
TCP Port Number for
FINS/TCP
The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed using TCP/IP, this port number must be allocated for the com-
munications service.
The Ethernet Unit’s default setting for the FINS/TCP local TCP port number
(i.e., the Ethernet Unit's TCP port number) is 9600. To set another number,
make the setting for the FINS/TCP port using the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.
The FINS/TCP port number set in the Unit Setup is used by the FINS/TCP
server's TCP socket. The FINS/TCP client's TCP socket uses any TCP port
number that can be used at that node. (With the Ethernet Unit and FinsGate-
way Ver. 2003, an unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized.)
At the Ethernet Unit, a TCP/IP frame that is received is recognized as a FINS
frame, according to the remote TCP port number in the received frame.
The host application is normally used as the FINS/TCP client. A user-set
number can be set for the TCP port number used by the host application.
FINS/TCP Connection
Numbers
FINS/TCP allows up to 16 FINS/TCP connections to be established simulta-
neously, and these 16 connections are managed at the Ethernet Unit by con-
nection numbers. When setting connections by means of the FINS/TCP
settings in the CX-Programmer's Unit Setup, set them individually using these
connection numbers.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
FINS/TCP Connection
Status (Word n+23)
While a connection with a remote node is established, the bit corresponding to
the FINS/TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit
words allocated in the CIO Area. The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi-
nated by an error in communications with a remote node or a FINS command
(i.e., FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+23
*: Bit 15 corresponds to connection No. 16, bit 00 to connection No. 1, etc.
FINS/TCP
Communications
Procedure
With FINS/TCP, FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a
connection is established. This makes it possible to determine the FINS node
addresses to which the 16 connection numbers are connected, and to man-
age them in an internal table.
Personal computer
(Client)
Ethernet Unit
(Server)
Example:
Example:
IP address C
IP address S
FINS node address A
FINS node address B
Passive open
Connection request (C→S)
Connection established
Active open
Connection established
Remote node address received
Local node address sent
FINS frame sent
Connection established
Local node address sent
Remote node address received
FINS frame sent
FINS node address A sent
FINS node address B sent
FINS node addresses
exchanged
Full duplex communications
Normal data communications
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP server, it is termi-
nated in the following ways.
• When the connection is closed by the client.
• When a FINS command to close the connection (FINS/TCP CONNEC-
TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST: command code 27 30 hexa-
decimal) is sent by the client.
• When there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is
in effect.
• If a command other than FINS FRAME SEND is received from the client,
the connection will close after the FINS FRAME SEND ERROR NOTIFI-
CATION command is sent.
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP client, it can be termi-
nated in the following ways.
• If the connection is closed by the server.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
• If there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is in
effect.
• If a command other than FINS FRAME SEND or CONNECTION CON-
FIRMATION is received from the server, the connection will close after the
FINS FRAME SEND ERROR NOTIFICATION command is sent.
Even if the connection is closed at the FINS/TCP client, requests continue to
be made to the FINS/TCP server every few seconds to open a connection.
Note
After the Ethernet Unit power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted, the IP
address for the connection used as the FINS/TCP client is the remote IP
address set under the FINS/TCP Tab in the Unit Setup.
To dynamically change the remote IP address (i.e., during CPU Unit opera-
tion), execute the CMND(490) instruction in the ladder program and send a
FINS command (FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE
REQUEST: command code 27 30 hexadecimal) to the Ethernet Unit.
Automatic Allocation
of FINS Node
Addresses
When the FINS message service is used, a FINS node addresses must also
be allocated in the host application for communications. The FINS node
addresses used by the host application are normally allocated in advance
using fixed allocations. When the FINS/TCP procedure is used, however, the
FINS node addresses used by the host application can be allocated automat-
ically at the Ethernet Unit.
■ Automatic Allocation Procedure
When exchanging FINS node addresses, node address 0 (node address not
set) is used for the client. At the server that receives the information, a num-
ber from the automatically allocated node addresses (default: 239 to 254)
controlled by the server that has not established a connection is automatically
allocated, and the FINS node address is sent to the client.
After exchanging the FINS node addresses, the client uses the allocated node
address (default: 239 to 254) to create FINS frames (substituting the value
allocated in SA1 of the FINS header).
Personal computer
(Client)
Ethernet Unit
(Server)
Example:
IP address S
FINS node address B
Example:
IP address C
FINS node address 0
Passive open
Connection request (C→S)
Connection established
Active open
Connection established
FINS node address 0 sent
Connection established
Remote node address received
Local node address sent
FINS node address sent
FINS node addresses exchanged
Normal data communications
Client: A
Server: B
Remote node address received
FINS frame sent
Local node address sent
FINS frame sent
Full duplex communications
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
■ Setting Range for Automatic Allocation of FINS Node Addresses
The range of node addresses that can be used as automatically allocated
FINS node addresses is set in the Ethernet Unit’s Unit Setup. Normally
(default status), node addresses 239 to 254 are allocated to each of the con-
nections 1 to 16. These allocations can be changed, but the default node
address setting range should be used if there is no particular reason for
changing it. When automatically allocated FINS node addresses are used, the
node addresses 239 to 254 are used for connecting to the host application, so
set the node address of the Ethernet Unit to a number outside this range.
■ Changing the Setting Range for Automatic Allocation of FINS Node
Addresses
Select the FINS/TCP Tab in the CX-Programmer Unit Setup. In the FINS/TCP
Tab, the allocated settings are displayed in a list for each connection number.
To change the automatically allocated FINS node addresses, use the mouse
to select the connection number to be changed, and click the Edit Button. The
FINS/TCP Connection Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
The FINS node address allocated to the connection is displayed to the right of
the Automatically Allocated FINS Node Address field. Change this number
and click the OK Button. After setting, complete the operation by transferring
the settings to the Ethernet Unit, in the same way as for normal Unit Setup
data.
Note
(1) Keep-alive Setting
The keep-alive function checks that the connection is still established
(alive) if communications do not occur for a set time period through a
communications line for which communications had been established.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
Even if the keep-alive function is not specified at the Ethernet Unit, a re-
sponse is sent for checks sent from other nodes. If the power is turned
OFF to the host application (e.g., personal computer) while a connection
is established, the connection is no longer required, but will remain open
until explicit close processing is performed. If the keep-alive option is se-
lected, the connection is checked periodically, and close processing is
performed if a response is not received. For normal operations, select the
keep-alive option.
(2) Keep-alive Monitor Time Setting
The liveness checking interval (keep-alive) can be set from the CX-Pro-
grammer in the TCP/IP keep-alive field of the Setup Tab in the Unit Setup.
The default setting is 120 minutes, as defined in RFC, but setting the timer
to several minutes is recommended when using FINS/TCP or other con-
trol applications.
Procedure for Using
FINS/TCP
1.
Make the basic settings.
Refer to Section 2 Startup Procedure in the Operation Manual, Construction of Net-
works.
↓
2.
Make the settings in the Unit Setup.
With the CX-Programmer connected online, select the Ethernet Unit in the CX-Program-
mer's I/O Table Window. Right-click, and select Unit Setup. Then make the following set-
tings in the Unit Setup Window.
Setup Tab
• FINS/TCP port (Default: 9600)
• TCP/IP keep-alive (Default: 120 minutes)
FINS/TCP Tab
• FINS/TCP server/client
Note: Set the server when connecting to host applications.
• Remote IP addresses
Note: When connecting to host applications, set the IP address of the permitted client
(personal computer or workstation) only when IP address protection is in effect. Do not
set if protection is not required.
• Automatically allocated FINS node addresses
• Keep-alive setting
• IP addresses protection setting
Note: When connecting to host applications, select this setting only when IP address
protection is in effect.
↓
3.
Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Net, and transfer them to each PLC.
↓
4.
Create host applications using a programming language such as C language and the
personal computer’s (workstation’s) socket interface.
Note
Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Pro-
grammer).
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network.
For details on setting routing tables, refer to the section on creating routing
tables in Section 6 FINS Communications in the Operation Manual, Construc-
tion of Networks.
7-4-2 FINS/TCP Mode Specifications
FINS/TCP Headers
FINS NODE ADDRESS
DATA SEND (CLIENT TO
SERVER) Command
When this command is executed, the client node stores its own FINS node
address in the client node address and notifies the server. This command is
sent after the TCP connection is established (ESTABLISH).
When specifying automatically allocated FINS node addresses, specify
00000000 hexadecimal for the client node address.
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP client or server, do
not send this command again. Otherwise, the error code (00000003 hexadec-
imal: The command is not supported) will be received in the FINS FRAME
SEND ERROR NOTIFICATION command and the connection will be termi-
nated.
Size
(bytes)
Header
Length
4
4
4
4
4
Command
Error code
FINS/TCP header
Client node address
The details of the above frame are shown in the following table.
Item
Contents (hexadecimal)
46494E53
Remarks
Header
Length
ASCII code: ‘FINS’
0000000C
12 bytes: Length of data from
command onwards.
Command
Error code
00000000
00000000
Not used, so does not require
checking by server.
Client node address 00000000 to 000000FE
0 to 254
Note: Client FINS node
addresses are automatically
obtained when set to 0.
(FINS node address
of FINS/TCP client)
FINS NODE ADDRESS
DATA SEND (SERVER TO
CLIENT) Command
When this command is executed, the server node notifies the client of its own
FINS node address. This command is sent after the server has received the
FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO SERVER) command. The
FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO SERVER) command
received by the server is decoded and if any errors are detected, the error
details are sent by adding to the Error Code in the command, and then the
connection is closed.
When this command is received by the client node, the TCP/IP port must be
closed quickly, unless the contents of the Error Code are 00000000 hexadeci-
mal (normal).
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
When automatically allocated FINS node addresses are set, the client node
address automatically allocated at the server is stored in the client node
address field.
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP client or server, do
not send this command again. Otherwise, the error code (00000003 hexadec-
imal: The command is not supported) will be received in the FINS FRAME
SEND ERROR NOTIFICATION command and the connection will be termi-
nated.
Size
(bytes)
4
4
4
4
4
Header
Length
Command
Error code
FINS/TCP header
Client node address
Server node address
4
The details of the above frame are shown in the following table.
Item
Contents (hexadecimal)
46494E53
Remarks
Header
Length
ASCII code: ‘FINS’
00000010
16 bytes: Length of data from
command onwards.
Command
Error code
00000001
---
Refer to the following table of
error codes.
Client node address 00000001 to 000000FE
1 to 254
(FINS node address
of FINS/TCP client)
Server node address 00000001 to 000000FE
1 to 254
(Fins node address
of FINS/TCP server)
The following table shows the list of error codes.
Error code
Details
(hexadecimal)
00000000
Normal
00000001
00000002
00000003
00000020
00000021
00000022
The header is not ‘FINS’ (ASCII code).
The data length is too long.
The command is not supported.
All connections are in use.
The specified node is already connected.
Attempt to access a protected node from an unspecified IP
address.
00000023
00000024
The client FINS node address is out of range.
The same FINS node address is being used by the client and
server.
00000025
All the node addresses available for allocation have been
used.
FINS FRAME SEND
Command
When FINS frames are sent using TCP/IP, always add the FINS FRAME
SEND command to the beginning of the FINS frame. The FINS frame is sepa-
rated out from the TCP data line following the data length in the FINS FRAME
SEND command.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
Size
(bytes)
4
4
4
4
Header
Length
FINS/TCP header
FINS frame
Command
Error code
12 to 2,012 (Refer to 7-2 FINS Frames for details.)
FINS frame
The details of the above frame are shown in the following table.
Item
Contents (hexadecimal)
46494E53
Remarks
Header
Length
ASCII code: ‘FINS’
00000014 to 000007E4
20 to 2020 bytes: Length of
data after command.
Command
Error code
00000002
00000000
Not used, so does not require
checking by at the receiving
end.
FINS frame
---
From FINS header ICF to end
of data.
FINS FRAME SEND
ERROR NOTIFICATION
Command
If an error occurs in the FINS/TCP header of the FINS FRAME SEND com-
mand, this command is used so that an error code will be returned to the node
that sent the FINS FRAME SEND command by the node that detected the
error. When this command is sent, the source node closes the connection.
The node that receives the command must close the connection quickly.
Size
(bytes)
Header
Length
4
4
4
4
FINS/TCP header
Command
Error code
The details of the above frame are shown in the following table.
Item
Contents (hexadecimal)
46494E53
Remarks
Header
Length
ASCII code: ‘FINS’
00000008
8 bytes: Length of data from
command onwards.
Command
Error code
00000003
---
Refer to the following table of
error codes.
The following table shows the list of error codes.
Error code
Details
(hexadecimal)
00000000
Normal
00000001
00000002
00000003
The header is not ‘FINS’ (ASCII code).
The data length is too long.
The command is not supported.
CONNECTION
CONFIRMATION
Command
This command is sent when the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLI-
ENT TO SERVER) command is received from a client with the same IP
address and FINS node address as another client with a connection that is
already established. The client that receives this command will simply destroy
the frames.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
After the command is sent, if ACK is returned in the TCP layer by the remote
node, the connection that is established is maintained. If RST is returned in
the TCP layer by the remote node, the established connection is closed.
If the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO SERVER) or FINS
NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (SERVER TO CLIENT) command is received
after a connection has already been established as a FINS/TCP client and
server, the error code (00000003 hexadecimal: command not supported) will
be sent in the FINS FRAME SEND ERROR NOTIFICATION command, and
the connection will be terminated.
The error code (00000021 hexadecimal: specified node already connected)
will be sent using an FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (SERVER TO CLI-
ENT) command to the connected node that received FINS NODE ADDRESS
DATA SEND (CLIENT TO SERVER) from the client with the same FINS node
address as the currently open connection, regardless of the result. Do not
send this command from the client. (The error code (00000003 hexadecimal:
command not supported) will be sent in the FINS FRAME SEND ERROR
NOTIFICATION command, and the connection will be terminated.)
Size
(bytes)
Header
Length
4
4
4
4
FINS/TCP header
Command
Reserve
The details of the above frame are shown in the following table.
Item
Contents (hexadecimal)
46494E53
Remarks
Header
Length
ASCII code: ‘FINS’
00000008
8 bytes: Length of data after
command.
Command
Error code
00000006
00000000
Not used, so does not require
checking at the receiving end
(client).
Connection Sequence
Normal Operation
Client
Server
accept
SYN
ACK
connect
SYN, ACK
A
send
recv
B
C
recv
ACK
Normal
send
D
ACK
ACK
E
F
send
recv
F
recv
connect
Socket interface
E
send
Message from TCP/IP layer
Message from host layer
ACK
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
1,2,3...
1. After the TCP connection is established, the client node address is sent by
the client to the server using the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLI-
ENT TO SERVER) command.
2. The client’s FINS node address (client node address) is obtained from the
received command.
3. The server’s node address is sent by the server to the client using the FINS
NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (SERVER TO CLIENT) command.
4. The server’s FINS node address is obtained from the received command.
5. The FINS message is sent using the FINS FRAME SEND command.
6. The FINS message is separated out from the received command.
Note
In steps 5 and 6 both the client and server can send and receive FINS mes-
sages (commands/responses) in both directions.
Error Connection
Sequence
Client
Server
accept
SYN
ACK
connect
SYN, ACK
A
D
send
recv
recv
B
C
ACK
Error
send
ACK
FIN
close
ACK
FIN
close
Socket interface
connect
Connection closed
according to TCP/IP
protocol procedure.
Message from TCP/IP layer
Message from host layer
1,2,3...
1. The client sends the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO
SERVER) command to the server.
2. The received command is decoded (e.g., if an error occurs, the code that
is not ‘FINS’ (ASCII code) in the command header is stored.)
3. The server sends the error code for the detected error (in this example,
00000001 hexadecimal: Header is not ‘FINS’ (ASCII code)) in the FINS
NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (SERVER TO CLIENT) command to the
client, and the TCP/IP port is closed.
4. The error code for the received command is decoded, and the TCP/IP port
is closed.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
Connection Sequence for
Automatic Allocation of
FINS Node Addresses
Server
Client
accept
SYN
ACK
connect
SYN, ACK
A
send
recv
B
recv
ACK
Normal
C
send
D
F
ACK
ACK
E
F
send
recv
recv
Socket interface
connect
E
send
Message from TCP/IP layer
Message from host layer
ACK
1,2,3...
1. The client specifies the client node address as 00000000 hexadecimal in
the server as the automatically allocated FINS node address, and sends it
using the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO SERVER)
command.
2. The server checks the client node address in the received command to see
whether an automatically allocated FINS node address is specified, and
the client node address is determined from the automatically allocated
FINS node addresses controlled by the server.
3. The server stores its own node address in the server node address field
and the automatically allocated client FINS node address in the client node
address field, and sends to the client using the FINS NODE ADDRESS
DATA SEND (SERVER TO CLIENT) command.
4. The server node address is obtained from the server node address field in
the received command, and the client node address is obtained from the
client node address field.
5. A FINS message is sent using the FINS FRAME SEND command.
6. The FINS message is separated out from the received command.
Note
In steps 5 and 6, both the client and server can send and receive FINS mes-
sages (commands/responses) in both directions.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
Recovery Connection
Sequence when Host
Computer (WS) is Stopped
by an Error
Server
Client
A
accept
accept
send
recv
B
C
recv
ACK
send
D
ACK
Power
interruption
E
SYN
ACK
connect
SYN, ACK
F
I
send
G
J
recv
ACK
H
send
close
Connection error check
RST
send
close
K
recv
FIN
FIN
close
ACK
L
Connection is closed using TCP/IP protocol procedure.
connect
ACK
1,2,3...
In steps 1 to 4 the FINS message send and receive processing is performed
using the FINS FRAME SEND command.
5. This example assumes that the host computer’s power is unexpectedly in-
terrupted. The normal close processing cannot be performed at the host
computer, and an attempt is made to establish a TCP connection at startup
of the application after the power is turned ON again.
6. After establishing a TCP connection, the client sends the client node ad-
dress to the server using the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLI-
ENT TO SERVER) command.
7. From the received command, the client’s node address is confirmed. At
this time, the server determines that an attempt is being made to establish
a connection with the same node address (see note), and detects a con-
nection error.
8. The server sends a CONNECTION CONFIRMATION command to the cli-
ent.
9. The client has lost the connection information from before the power inter-
ruption, so sends a response with an RST frame in the TCP layer. The
server that received the RST response closes the connection.
10. The server sends the error code (00000021 hexadecimal: Specified node
is already connected) to the client using the FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA
SEND (SERVER TO CLIENT) command.
11. The error code in the received command is also decoded by the client, and
the TCP/IP port is closed.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
From step 12 onwards, the connection is established again.
Note
When FINS node addresses are automatically allocated, the node address
cannot be specified, so the connection remains open until it is closed by the
keep-alive function.
7-4-3 Sending Commands from a Host Computer
When sending FINS commands from a computer, the command data in the
computer’s program must be created in command frame format. The frame
formats are also used to decode the responses received from other network
nodes.
Designating Remote
Addresses
The host computer’s TCP sockets are used when sending FINS commands
from a host computer to a PLC. This section provides examples of addressing
remote CPU Units from the host computer for communications.
Note
(1) The FINS TCP port number at the Ethernet Unit is set to the default of
9600. It can be changed in the Unit Setup.
(2) Even if the Ethernet network is comprised of multiple segments, set the
same value for the FINS network address.
■ Example 1: Host Computer and Remote Node (Ethernet Unit) on Same
Network (Intranet)
Host computer
IP address:
Remote node
IP address:
196.36.32.50
196.36.32.100
FINS network address:
FINS node address:
FINS unit number:
1
50
0
FINS network address:
FINS node address:
FINS unit number:
1
100
0
Ethernet
Communications Parameters Used by Host Computer
Destination IP Address: 196.36.32.100 (Ethernet Unit of remote node)
UDP port number: FINS UDP port No. (Ethernet Unit of remote node)
FINS addresses (Remote node CPU Unit):
Network address: 1
Node address: 100
Unit number: 0
FINS addresses (Host computer):
Network address: 1
Node address: 50
Unit number: 0
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
■ Example 2: Host Computer and Remote Node Connected Via Relay Node
(Ethernet Unit)
Host computer
IP address: 196.36.32.50
Remote node
FINS network address: 1
FINS node address: 50
FINS unit number: 0
FINS network address: 2
FINS node address: 1
FINS unit number: 0
Relay node
IP address: 196.36.32.100
Ethernet
Unit
Controller Link
Controller Link
Unit
Ethernet
Destination IP Address: 196.36.32.100 (Ethernet Unit of relay node)
UDP port number: FINS UDP port number (Ethernet Unit of relay node)
FINS addresses (Remote node CPU Unit):
Network address: 2
Node address: 1
Unit number: 0
FINS addresses (Host computer):
Network address: 1
Node address: 50
Unit number: 0
FINS/TCP Sample
Program
Operation Overview
• This program reads 150 words of the PLC memory beginning at D00100
by sending a FINS command (MEMORY AREA READ, command code
0101) from a UNIX workstation (WS) to the PLC on the Ethernet network.
• If no response is received within two seconds of sending the FINS com-
mand, an error will occur.
Settings
• The Ethernet Unit IP address is 196.36.32.100, and the FINS node
address is 100.
• The FINS TCP port number at the Ethernet Unit (server side) is 9600
(default).
• The workstation’s IP address is 196.36.32.50 and the FINS node address
is allocated automatically.
• The FINS TCP port number at the workstation (client side) can be user-
set (if set to 0, the system automatically allocates an available port).
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
Sample Program
1 #include <errno.h>
2 #include <stdio.h>
3 #include <sys/types.h>
4 #include <sys/socket.h>
5 #include <netinet/in.h>
6 #include <signal.h>
7
8 #define FINS_TCP_PORT 9600
9 #define SERV_IP_ADDR "196.36.32.100"/* Ethernet Unit IP ADDRESS*/
10 #define MAX_MSG 2010
11 #define MAX_HEADER 32
12 #define RESP_TIMEOUT 2
13
14
15 /*
16 * FINS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS SAMPLE PROGRAM
17 */
18 main(argc,argv)
19 int argc;
20 char *argv[];
21 {
22 int sockfd;
23 struct sockaddr_in ws_addr, cs_addr;
24 unsigned char fins_cmnd[MAX_MSG], fins_resp[MAX_MSG], fins_tcp_header[MAX_HEADER];
25 unsigned char srv_node_no, cli_node_no;
26 int sendlen, recvlen;
27 char sid = 0;
28 extern recv_fail();
29
GENERATE TCP SOCKET*/
30 /*
31 if ((sockfd = socket(AF_INET,SOCK_STREAM,0)) < 0)
32 err_exit("can't open stream socket");
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
33
34 /* ALLOCATE IP ADDRESS AND PORT # TO SOCKET*/
35 bzero((char *) &ws_addr,sizeof(ws_addr));
36 ws_addr.sin_family = AF_INET;
37 ws_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(INADDR_ANY);
38 ws_addr.sin_port = htons(0); /*
39
ASSIGN LOCAL TCP PORT NUMBER
40 if (bind(sockfd,(struct sockaddr *)&ws_addr,sizeof(ws_addr)) < 0)
41
42
err_exit(“can’t bind local address”);
43 /* ESTABLISH CONNECTION WITH FINS/TCP SERVER*/
44 bzero((char *) &cs_addr,sizeof(cs_addr));
45 cs_addr.sin_family = AF_INET;
46 cs_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = inet_addr(SERV_IP_ADDR);
47 cs_addr.sin_port = htons(FINS_TCP_PORT);
48
49 if (connect(sockfd,(struct sockaddr *)&cs_addr,sizeof(cs_addr)) < 0)
50
51
52
err_exit(“can’t connect to FINS/TCP server”);
53 /* SEND FINS/TCP COMMAND*/
54 /*
55 * GENERATE FINS NODE NUMBER DATA SEND COMMAND (CLIENT TO SERVER)
56 */
57 fins_tcp_header[0] = ‘F’; /* Header */
58 fins_tcp_header[1] = ‘I’;
59 fins_tcp_header[2] = ‘N’;
60 fins_tcp_header[3] = ‘S’;
61 fins_tcp_header[4] = 0x00; /* Length */
62 fins_tcp_header[5] = 0x00;
63 fins_tcp_header[6] = 0x00;
64 fins_tcp_header[7] = 0x0C;
65 fins_tcp_header[8] = 0x00; /* Command */
66 fins_tcp_header[9] = 0x00;
67 fins_tcp_header[10] = 0x00;
68 fins_tcp_header[11] = 0x00;
69 fins_tcp_header[12] = 0x00; /* Error Code */
70 fins_tcp_header[13] = 0x00;
71 fins_tcp_header[14] = 0x00;
72 fins_tcp_header[15] = 0x00;
73 fins_tcp_header[17] = 0x00; /* Client Node Add */
74 fins_tcp_header[18] = 0x00;
75 fins_tcp_header[19] = 0x00;
76 fins_tcp_header[20] = 0x00; /*AUTOMATICALLY GET FINS CLIENT FINS NODE NUMBER*/
77
78 /*
SEND FINS/TCP COMMAND*/
79 sendlen = 20;
80
81 if (send(sockfd,fins_tcp_header,sendlen,0) == sendlen)
82
83
84
85
{
alarm(RESP_TIMEOUT); /* START RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
printf(“FINS/TCP header send length %d¥n”,sendlen);
}
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
86 else
87
88
89
90
{
err_exit("FINS/TCP header send error");
}
91 /*RECEIVE FINS/TCP COMMAND (READ RECEIVE FUNCTIONS)*/
92 recvlen = 24;
93 if (tcp_recv(sockfd, fins_tcp_header, recvlen) == recvlen)
94
95
96
97
{
alarm(0); /*STOP RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
/* CONFIRM WHETHER FINS NODE NUMBER SEND COMMAND
(CLIENT TO SERVER) WAS RECEIVED*/
|
|
98
if ((fins_tcp_header[8] != 0x00) | (fins_tcp_header[9] != 0x00) |
0x00) || (fins_tcp_header[11] !=
0x01))
99
100
101
(fins_tcp_header[10] !=
{
}
err_exit("FINS/TCP illegal command error");
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
printf("FINS/TCP header receive length %d¥n",recvlen);
cli_node_no = fins_tcp_header[19];
srv_node_no = fins_tcp_header[23];
printf("FINS/TCP client Node No. = %d¥n",cli_node_no);
printf("FINS/TCP server Node No. = %d¥n",srv_node_no);
}
110 else
111
112
113
114
{
}
err_exit("TCP receive error");
115 /* SEND FINS/TCP COMMAND*/
116 /*
117
*
GENERATE FINS COMMAND FRAME
118 */
119 fins_tcp_header[0] = 'F'; /* Header */
120 fins_tcp_header[1] = 'I';
121 fins_tcp_header[2] = 'N';
122 fins_tcp_header[3] = 'S';
123 fins_tcp_header[4] = 0x00; /* Length */
124 fins_tcp_header[5] = 0x00;
125 fins_tcp_header[6] = 0x00;
126 fins_tcp_header[7] = 8+18; /*Length of data from Command up to end of FINS frame */
127 fins_tcp_header[8] = 0x00; /* Command */
128 fins_tcp_header[9] = 0x00;
129 fins_tcp_header[10] = 0x00;
130 fins_tcp_header[11] = 0x02;
131 fins_tcp_header[12] = 0x00; /* Error Code */
132 fins_tcp_header[13] = 0x00;
133 fins_tcp_header[14] = 0x00;
134 fins_tcp_header[15] = 0x00;
135
136 /* SEND FINS/TCP COMMAND*/
137 sendlen = 16;
138 if (send(sockfd,fins_tcp_header,sendlen,0) == sendlen) {
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
START RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
140 printf("FINS/TCP header send length %d¥n",sendlen);
141
139 alarm(RESP_TIMEOUT); /*
}
142 else {
143 err_exit("FINS/TCP header send error");
144
145
146
}
147 /* SEND FINS COMMAND FRAME*/
148 /*
GENERATE MEMORY AREA READ COMMAND
149
*
150 * (READ 150 WORDS FROM DM 100)
151 */
152 fins_cmnd[0] = 0x80; /* ICF */
153 fins_cmnd[1] = 0x00; /* RSV */
154 fins_cmnd[2] = 0x02; /* GCT */
155 fins_cmnd[3] = 0x00; /* DNA */
156 fins_cmnd[4] = srv_node_no; /* DA1 *//*
157 fins_cmnd[5] = 0x00; /* DA2 */
158 fins_cmnd[6] = 0x00; /* SNA */
Ethernet Unit FINS NODE NUMBER*/
159 fins_cmnd[7] = cli_node_no; /* SA1 *//* WS FINS NODE NUMBER OBTAINED
AUTOMATICALLY*/
160
161 fins_cmnd[8] = 0x00; /* SA2 */
162 fins_cmnd[9] = ++sid; /* SID */
163 fins_cmnd[10] = 0x01; /* MRC */
164 fins_cmnd[11] = 0x01; /* SRC */
165 fins_cmnd[12] = 0x82; /* VARIABLE TYPE: DM*/
READ START ADDRESS: 100*/
166 fins_cmnd[13] = 0x00; /*
167 fins_cmnd[14] = 0x64;
168 fins_cmnd[15] = 0x00;
169 fins_cmnd[16] = 0x00; /*
170 fins_cmnd[17] = 0x96;
WORDS READ: 150*/
171
SEND FINS COMMAND FRAME*/
172 signal(SIGALRM,recv_fail);
173 sendlen = 18;
174 if (send(sockfd,fins_cmnd,sendlen,0) == sendlen)
175
176
177
{
}
printf("send length %d¥n",sendlen);
178 else
179
180
181
182
{
}
err_exit("send error");
183 /* RECEIVE FINS/TCP COMMAND (READ RECEIVE FUNCTIONS)*/
184 recvlen = 16;
185 if (tcp_recv(sockfd, fins_tcp_header, recvlen) == recvlen)
186
187
188
189
190
191
{
/* CONFIRM WHETHER FINS FRAME SEND COMMAND WAS RECEIVED*/
if ((fins_tcp_header[8] != 0x00) || (fins_tcp_header[9] != 0x00) ||
(fins_tcp_header[10] != 0x00) || (fins_tcp_header[11] != 0x02))
{
err_exit("FINS/TCP illegal command error");
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
}
printf("FINS/TCP header receive length %d¥n",recvlen);
recvlen = fins_tcp_header[6];
recvlen <<=8;
recvlen += fins_tcp_header[7];
recvlen -= 8; /* SUBTRACT LENGTH OF COMMAND & ERROR CODE OF FINS/TCP HEADER*/
printf("FINS/TCP frame receive length %d¥n",recvlen);
}
201 else
202
203
204
205
{
}
err_exit("TCP receive error");
206 /* RECEIVE FINS RESPONSE FRAME*/
207 if (tcp_recv(sockfd, fins_resp, recvlen) == recvlen)
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
{
STOP RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER*/
alarm(0); /*
printf("recv length %d¥n",recvlen);
if (recvlen < 14) /*
ILLEGAL RESPONSE LENGTH CHECK*/
err_exit("FINS length error");
if ((fins_cmnd[3] != fins_resp[6]) || (fins_cmnd[4] != fins_resp[7]) ||
(fins_cmnd[5] != fins_resp[8]) )
{
/* DESTINATION ADDRESS CHECK*/
err_exit("illegal source address error");
}
if(fins_cmnd[9] != fins_resp[9]) /* SID CHECK
err_exit("illegal SID error");
*/
}
224 else
225
226
227
228
229
230
{
alarm(0); /*
STOP RESPONSE MONITOR TIMER
err_exit("receive error");
}
231 /*
*/
CLOSE SOCKET
232 close(sockfd);
233
234 }
235
236
237 /*
RECEIVE PROCESSING (RECEIVE REPEATED UP TO THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF BYTES)
238 * TCP
239 */
240 int tcp_recv(sockfd, buf, len)
241 int sockfd;
242 unsigned char *buf;
243 int len;
244 {
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 7-4
245 int total_len = 0;
246 int recv_len;
247
248 for (;;)
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
{
recv_len = recv(sockfd, (char *)buf, len, 0);
if (recv_len > 0)
{
if (recv_len < (int)len)
{
len -= recv_len;
buf += recv_len;
total_len += recv_len;
}
else
{
total_len += recv_len;
break;
}
}
else
{
err_exit("TCP receive error");
total_len = 0;
break;
}
}
274 return total_len;
275
276 }
277
278 /*
279 * ERROR PROCESSING FUNCTIONS
280 */
281 err_exit(err_msg)
282 char *err_msg;
283 {
284 printf("client: %s %x¥n",err_msg,errno);
285 exit(1);
286 }
287
288 /*
SIGNAL CAPTURE FUNCTIONS
289 *
290 */
291 recv_fail()
292 {
293 printf("response timeout error ¥n");
294 }
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU Unit
Section 7-5
7-5 Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU
Unit
The time for the response to be received after a remote node on the Ethernet
network sends a memory area read or write command to a PLC can be calcu-
lated using the following formula.
Write Command
Delay Time
Maximum transmission delay =
Transmission processing time (remote node)
+ Transmission delays
+ Reception processing time (command) (local node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node)
+ Transmission processing time (response) (local node)
+ Transmission delays
+ Reception processing time (remote node)
Transmission Delay
The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the Ethernet
Unit, as shown in the following table. (Additional delays may depending on
devices, such as hubs, in the network configuration.)
Baud rate
100Base-TX
10Base-TX
Delay time
Number of words sent × 0.0013 + 0.0118 ms
Number of words sent × 0.0019 + 0.0157 ms
Receive Processing
(Command)
Number of words sent × 0.003 + 0.704 ms
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU execution mode
Processing time considerations
CPU Unit cycle time
Ethernet Unit is given prior- Time slice instruction execu-
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral ser-
vicing
ity.
tion time
Ethernet Unit is not given
priority.
CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with CPU Unit cycle time
synchronous memory
access
Parallel processing with 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral
asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit,
access
peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner Board)
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time
The CPU Bus Unit service processing time is determined according to the
CPU execution processing mode at the CPU Unit, as shown in the following
table.
CPU execution mode
Processing time considerations
Set time for peripheral servicing
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral ser-
vicing
Priority given to Ethernet
Unit
Time slice peripheral servic-
ing execution time
Priority not given to Ethernet Set peripheral servicing time
Unit
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit
cycle time)
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU Unit
Section 7-5
CPU execution mode
Processing time considerations
Parallel processing with Set time for peripheral servicing
synchronous memory
access
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Parallel processing with 1 ms max.
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
0.704 ms
Transmission Processing
(Response)
Note
The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than
those calculated with the methods given here. Among the causes of longer
delays are the following: traffic on the network, window sizes at network
nodes, traffic through the Ethernet Unit (e.g., simultaneous socket servicing
and FTP server communications, etc.), and the system configuration.
Read Command Delay
Time
Maximum transmission delay =
Transmission processing time (remote node)
+ Transmission delays
+ Reception processing time (command) (local node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node)
+ Transmission processing time (response) (local node)
+ Transmission delays
+ Reception processing time (remote node)
Transmission Delay
The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the Ethernet
Unit, as shown in the following table. (Additional delays may depending on
devices, such as hubs, in the network configuration.)
Baud rate
100Base-TX
Delay time
Command 0.0118 ms
Response
Number of words sent × 0.0013 + 0.0118 ms
10Base-T
0.704 ms
Command 0.0157 ms
Response
Number of words sent × 0.0019 + 0.0157 ms
Reception Processing
(Command)
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU execution mode
Processing time considerations
Normal Mode
CPU Unit cycle time
Ethernet Unit is given prior- Time slice instruction execu-
Priority peripheral ser-
vicing
ity.
tion time
Ethernet Unit is not given
priority.
CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with CPU Unit cycle time
synchronous memory
access
Parallel processing with 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. of peripheral
asynchronous memory servicing time for each Special I/O Unit, CPU Bus Unit,
access
peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner Board)
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Transmission Delays: Writing/Reading to CPU Unit
Section 7-5
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time
The processing time will be as follows, depending on the CPU processing
mode settings at the CPU Unit.
CPU execution mode
Processing time considerations
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Normal Mode
Priority peripheral ser-
vicing
Ethernet Unit is given
priority.
Time slice peripheral servicing
execution time
Ethernet Unit is not
given priority.
Set peripheral servicing time
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle
time)
Parallel processing with Set peripheral servicing time
synchronous memory
access
(Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time)
Parallel processing with 1 ms max.
asynchronous memory
access
For details, refer to the CPU Unit operation manual.
Transmission Processing
(Response)
Number of words sent × 0.003 + 0.704 ms
Note
The actual operating environment can cause transmission delays larger than
those calculated with the methods given here. Among the causes of longer
delays are the following: traffic on the network, window sizes at network
nodes, traffic through the Ethernet Unit (e.g., simultaneous socket servicing
and FTP server communications, etc.), and the system configuration.
Example Calculations
The following example shows calculations for sending 256 words between two
PLC nodes using SEND(090). Calculations are shown in the following table.
Conditions
CPU cycle time: 10 ms
CPU execution mode: Normal
CPU uniform peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
Baud rate: 100Base-TX
Item
Calculation
Personal computer transmission pro- ---
cessing time
Transmission delay (command)
256 × 0.0013 + 0.0118 = 0.3446 ≈ 0.3 ms
Reception processing time local
node) (command)
256 × 0.003 + 0.704 = 1.472 ≈ 1.5 ms
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local
node)
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (local node)
0.4 ms
Transmission processing time (local 0.704 ms ≈ 0.7 ms
node) (response)
Transmission delay (command)
0.0118 ms ≈ 0.1 ms
Personal computer reception pro-
cessing time
---
Maximum transmission delay time
Personal computer transmission/reception
processing time + 0.3 +1.5 + 10 + 0.4 + 0.7 +
0.1 = personal computer transmission/recep-
tion processing time + 13.0 ms
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Ethernet Network Parameters
Parameter
TCP send buffer
TCP receive buffer
UDP send buffer
UDP receive buffer
RAW send buffer
RAW receive buffer
FINS receive buffer
Hold timer
Value
4,096 bytes
Description
Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the UDP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer
Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer
4,096 bytes
9,000 bytes
9,016 bytes
2,048 bytes
2,048 bytes
16,383 bytes
75 s (12 min max.)
The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets. A
ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within 75 s.
Resend timer
Initial value:
1 s The resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival
Maximum value: 64 s confirmations when transferring data via socket services, including FTP
server and mail transfer TCP sockets. If the timer setting is exceeded
before arrival confirmation is received, data is resent. Resends are per-
formed from the first timeout (1 s) through the 12th timeout (64 s). A
ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout.
Continue timer
Initial value:
5 s The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send
Maximum value: 60 s data but the send window is too small (either 0 or too small) to send the
data and the remote node has not requested that communications be
restarted. Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote
node when the continue timer times out. The initial value of the timer is
5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas-
ingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached.
2MSL timer
60 s
The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and
will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status.
IP reassemble timer
ARP timer
12 s
A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within 12
seconds.
20 min/3 min
If a complete ARP table entry (with an Ethernet address) is not referred
to for 20 minutes, it is removed from the table.
An incomplete ARP table entry (no response yet returned to the ARP
request) is removed from the table after 3 minutes.
Window size
4,096 bytes
The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver-
gence of TCP sockets. Actually, the node negotiates with the remote
node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes. The window
size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of
the remote node when processing communications.
Fragment size
Segment size
1,500 bytes
1,024 bytes
30
UDP data is separated into 1,472-byte fragments. The remaining
28 bytes are for the IP header.
TCP data is separated into 1,024-byte units, unless the segments are dif-
ferent, in which case it will be separated into 536-byte units.
TTL (Time to Live)
Decremented each time an IP router is passed.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Network Parameters
Appendix A
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Buffer Configuration
UDP socket
(See note 1.)
reception
request buffers
(8 × 9,016 max.)
TCP socket
reception
(See note 1.)
request buffers
(8 × 4,096 max.)
IP packet input
queue
(50 max. ×
1,500 bytes)
FTP service
reception buffer
(4,096 bytes)
FINS reception
buffer (16,383
bytes max.)
FINS processing
buffers (192 ×
2,020 bytes)
Communications
controller
Network
FINS send
buffer (9,000
bytes max.)
FTP service
send buffer
(4,096 bytes)
IP packet
output queue
(50 max. ×
1,500 bytes)
TCP socket send
request buffers (8
× 4,096 max.)
(See note 2.)
UDP socket send
request buffers
(8 × 9,000 max.)
(See note 2.)
Network memory (248K bytes)
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buffer Configuration
Appendix B
Network Memory
Most of the buffers used for communications servicing by the Ethernet Unit are administered in a buffer config-
uration called network memory. Network memory consists of 196K bytes of memory divided into short and long
buffers. The use of short and long buffers is determined by the status of the various services when the Ethernet
Unit is running. The capacity of all buffers cannot be used due to limits in the mounted memory capacity. The
status of the short and long buffers can be accessed by execution the FINS command MEMORY STATUS
READ (2763).
Note 1. The status of UDP and TCP socket reception request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS
command SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
The status of UDP and TCP socket send request buffers can be accessed by executing the FINS command
SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
TCP Status Transitions
The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command
SOCKET STATUS READ (2764).
CLOSED
ACTIVE OPEN
snd SYN
CLOSE
Passive OPEN
LISTEN
CLOSE
rcv SYN
SEND
snd SYN,ACK
snd SYN
rcv SYN
snd ACK
SYN
RECEIVED
SYN
SENT
rcv ACK of SYN
rcv SYN,ACK
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
ESTABLISHED
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
CLOSED
WAIT
FIN
WAIT-1
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
rcv ACK of FIN
FIN WAIT-2
CLOSING
LAST-ACK
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv FIN
snd ACK
Timeout=2MSL
CLOSED
TIME WAIT
Status
Meaning
CLOSED
Connection closed.
LISTEN
Waiting for connection.
SYN SENT
SYN RECEIVED
ESTABLISHED
CLOSE WAIT
FIN WAIT 1
CLOSING
SYN sent in active status.
SYN received and sent.
Already established.
FIN received and waiting for completion.
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
LAST ACK
FIN WAIT 2
TIME WAIT
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life
(2MSL).
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP Status Transitions
Appendix C
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
ASCII Characters
Bits 1 to 4
Binary
Bits 5 to 7
0000
0
0001
1
0010
0011
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
Hex
2
3
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL
DLE
Space
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
p
q
r
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
!
a
b
c
d
e
f
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
HT
)
LF
SUB
ESC
FS
*
+
,
J
j
VT
;
K
L
k
l
FF
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR
GS
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
SO
RS
.
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ASCII Characters
Appendix D
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Maintenance
The Ethernet Unit makes up part of a network. Repair a defective Ethernet Unit as soon as possible as it can
have a negative effect on the entire network. We recommend that customers keep one or more spare Ethernet
Units to allow immediate recovery of the network.
Replacing an Ethernet Unit
Observe the following precautions when replacing the Ethernet Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply before replacing the Ethernet Unit.
• Check that the spare Ethernet Unit is operating normally before replacing a defective Unit with it.
• When returning a defective Unit for repairs, provide as much written information as possible on the symp-
toms of the problem.
• If a problem occurs with poor contacts, wipe the contacts with a clean cloth soaked with industrial alcohol.
Carefully remove any lint remaining on the contacts before replacing the Unit.
Settings after Replacing an Ethernet Unit
After replacing an Ethernet Unit, set the following to the same settings as were used on the previous Unit.
• Unit number
• Node address
Settings After Replacing a CPU
The EEPROM in the PLC’s CPU holds the information listed below. This information must be stored in any new
CPU used to replace a defective one.
• Routing tables
• System Setup for the Ethernet Unit
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Appendix E
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Inspections
Carry out regular inspections to ensure the Ethernet Unit is functioning perfectly.
Items
Most of the parts that make up an Ethernet Unit are semiconductor components. None of the parts in the Unit
will wear out after a specific lifetime, but some parts may deteriorate due to extreme operating condition.
Therefore, it is important to inspect the Unit regularly.
Inspection Interval
Normally inspect once or twice per year. Choose the inspection period according to the severity of the operat-
ing conditions.
Inspection Items
Correct any of the items in the table below not conforming to the specified standard.
Item
Details
Standard
Environment
Temperature around Unit
0 to 55°C
Humidity around Unit
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
No accumulated dust
No looseness
Accumulated dust
Mounting
Ethernet Unit firmly attached
Transceiver cable connector fully pushed in
Condition of transceiver cable
Twisted-pair cable connector fully pushed in
Condition of twisted-pair cable
No looseness
No visible abnormality
No looseness
No visible abnormality
Tools Required for Inspection
The following tools are needed to inspect the Ethernet Unit:
Standard Tools
• Flat-blade and Phillips screwdrivers
• Tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and a clean cloth
Tools Required Under Special Circumstances
• Synchroscope
• Pen oscilloscope
• Thermometer and hygrometer
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inspections
Appendix F
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
transmission delays, 193
Bit value change field, 23
Numerics
100Base-TX
10Base-T
bits
Close Request Switch, 120
transmission delays, 193
Send Request Switch, 119
A
Accessing Memory/Sending Mail Flag, 25
Account Name field, 6, 19, 39
buffers, 195
configuration, 197
bye command, 68, 73, 77
Adjust Time field, 92, 93
applications
examples
precautions, xxiv
C
cd command, 68, 73, 75
cdup command, 68, 73
ASCII characters, 201
command/response format, 53
ChangeMode field, 41
Attached file name field, 20, 23
Attached file type field, 22
attached files
CJ1W-ETN11
extensions
TXT, 15, 61
clock
file data, 15
close command, 68, 73, 77
Close Request Switch, 120
CMND(490) instruction, 99
commands
transfer times, 27, 62
Auto Adjust Time field, 92, 93
Auto Adjust Time Tab, 92, 93
automatic clock adjustment, 2, 3
errors
FTP commands, 73
remote mail commands, 42
CPU Bus Unit Setup
error log, 95
overview, 90
CPU Bus Units
precautions, xxvi
CPU condition field, 24
crimp terminals, xxv
CS1W-ETN01/11
settings, 92
specifications, 91
mail send function comparison, 11
CSV field, 41
CSV format, 15, 27, 61
CX-Programmer
Unit Setup, 30
B
baud rate
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
ERC indicator
D
DNS communications, 3
ERH indicator
error log
error codes, 29
errors, 94
DNS Tab, 6, 19, 39, 92
initial settings, 31
ErrorLogClear field, 41
command/response format, 54
ErrorLogRead field, 41
E
errors
error codes
EM File Memory, 80
using, 80
error messages, 78
mail receive function, 63
troubleshooting
E-mail
receiving, 41
data sent, 22
encoding, 17
Ethernet communications
network parameters, 195
parameters, 195
Ethernet Units
replacing, 203
resetting, 203
encryption, 17, 37
errors
protection, 40
ETN condition field, 23
F
protocols, 17
FALS instruction, xxiii
send status, 17
subject line, 17, 36
EMI Standard, xxvi
EMS Standard, xxvi
file extensions
IOM, 15
TXT, 15
FileDelete field, 41
FileList field, 41
command/response format, 44
FileRead field, 41
encoding
mail send function, 17
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FileWrite field, 41
FTP communications, 4
FTP indicator, 79
address conversion, 161
application layers, 160
FTP server, 2, 3
commands
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION, 179
FINS FRAME SEND, 178
cd, 75
get, 76
ls, 74
put, 76
type, 76
FINS NODE ADDRESS DATA SEND (CLIENT TO
format, 162
headers, 162
connection sequences, 180
headers, 177
procedure, 173, 176
frame format, 164
user, 74
connecting, 69, 73
quitting, 77
status, 79
procedure, 165
protection, 161
protocols, 161
FTP Status Flag, 79
FWRIT instruction, 26, 60
using FINS/TCP, 161
G
FINS node addresses
get command, 68, 73, 76, 85
Get the time information from the SNTP server field, 92, 93
command/response format, 59
FinsSend field, 42
H
HOST indicator
flags
error display, 29
Host name field, 5, 6, 19, 39, 92, 93
FTP Status Flag, 79
Port Enabled Flag, 139
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
settings, 40
encryption, 37
I
IOM format, 60
creating, 30
ICF, 162
installation
errors, 63
location, xxiv
protocols, 36
settings, 39
DNS Tab, 39
IOM field, 41
IOM format, 15, 26
command/response format, 51
IOMRead field, 41
IOMWrite field, 41
IP Address field, 5, 7, 19, 39, 92, 93
specifications, 36
status, 60
IP communications
IP addresses
remote devices, 117
programming examples, 127, 131, 141, 149
advantages, 10
L
transfer times, 27
LNK indicator
error display, 29
locking devices
precautions, xxv
body, 17
conditions, 11, 22
data sent, 22
Low Voltage Directive, xxvi
ls command, 68, 73, 74
encryption, 17
M
Mail password field, 6, 19, 39
mail receive function, 2
error codes, 29
errors, 28
procedure, 18
protocols, 17
send conditions, 17
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
settings, 19
operating environment
precautions, xxiv
POP Tab, 19
P
SMTP settings, 4
status, 17, 24
Password field, 71
POP Tab, 5, 39
POP3 server, 6
Port Enabled Flag, 139
port numbers
subject, 17
user-set information, 14
Mail Send Switch, 25
MailLogClear field, 42
maintenance, 203
inspections, 205
sockets, 99
Memory Cards, 69, 80
See also FTP server
general, xxii
sending stored files, 16
mget command, 68, 73, 76
mput command, 68, 73, 76
MRES, 139
replacing Units, 203
safety, xxii
socket services, 155
TCP communications, 102
UDP communications, 102
N
networks
protocols
network parameters, 195
noise, xxiv
FINS, 4
POP, 3
SMTP, 3, 17, 37
SNTP, 4
O
OBJ field, 41
online editing, xxiii
table, 3
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP, 4
UDP/IP, 4
put command, 68, 73, 76, 85
pwd command, 68, 73, 75
Send file data or I/O memory data field, 22
Send Mail Status words, 24, 25
Send mail upon trigger field, 22
Send Request Switch, 119
Send user data field, 20, 22
Q
quit command, 68, 73, 77
Server specification type field, 4, 6, 19, 39, 92, 93
Setup Tab, 71
R
radioactivity, xxiv
short-circuits
Receive Mail Tab, 39, 40
Receive Request Switch, 119
SMTP Tab, 4, 19, 39
remote mail commands
SNTP communications, 4
command/response format, 42
mail receive function
automatic clock adjustment
errors, 94
socket services, 2, 3
parameters, 112
initial settings, 66
response codes, 59
sending, 66
sending FINS commands, 36
precautions, 155
precautions, 156
TCP communications, 105
replacing Units
precautions, xxv
response codes
remote mail commands, 59
TCP sockets
status, 110
timing charts, 125, 139
UDP communications, 105
Results Storage Area, 139
Retry timer field, 7, 19, 39, 92, 93
routing tables
UDP sockets
RUN indicator
status, 110
using Socket Service Request Switches, 104
error display, 29
sockets
S
opening, 100
overview, 99
safety precautions, xxii
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP
conditions, 13
TXT field, 41
TXT format, 15, 26, 61
type command, 68, 73, 76
number, 117
UDP socket
number, 117
UDP sockets, 166
specifications
U
UDP communications
data fragmentation, 102
precautions, 102
FTP server, 68
SRES, 139
precautions, xxv
socket services
parameters, 116
UDP/IP communications, 4
command/response format, 47
UMBackup field, 41
UNIX
STD field, 41
switches
Socket Service Request Switches, 119
application examples, 86
Use POP before SMTP field, 5, 19, 39
T
TCP communications
data fragmentation, 102
precautions, 102
user name
specifying, 74
User-defined mail address field, 22
socket services
W
sockets, 100
status, 199
Word value change field, 23
WRITE DATA FILE (FWRIT) instruction, 26, 60
terminal blocks, xxiii
Test field, 42
timers, 195
timing
socket communications, 139
transmission
Trigger type field, 20
triggers, 13, 17, 18, 23
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W421-E1-03
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
July 2003
Revised content
1
Original production
02
March 2004
The following revisions were made.
Page xiv: Added information on unit versions.
Page 91: Corrected and changed information in tables and procedure.
Page 150: Corrected “114 (0072hex)” to “116 (0074hex)” and “14 bytes” to “16 bytes”
for D00020.
Page 173: Added information on FINS/TCP connections.
Page 177: Added information on FINS/TCP connections.
Page 179: Added information on FINS/TCP connections.
Page 199: Added table on TCP status transitions.
03
November 2005 Page v: Information on general precautions notation added.
Page xv: Information on liability and warranty added.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authorized Distributor:
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W421-E1-03
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|